I
Seats and Restraint Systems ...... 1-1 This section tells you howto use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the“SRS” system. FeaturesandControls ...... 2-1 This section explains how to start and operate your Pontiac. Comfort Controls and Audio Systems ...... 3-1 This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. YourDrivingandtheRoad ...... 4-1 Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and tohow drive under different conditions. Problemson’theRoad ...... 5-1 This section tells you whatto do if you have a problem while driving, suchas a flat tireor overheated engine, etc. Service and Appearance Care ...... 6-1 Here the manual tells youhow to keep your Pontiac running properly and looking good. Maintenanceschedule...... 7-1 This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricantsuse. to CustomerAssistance Information ...... 8-1 This section tells you howto contact Pontiac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page8-9. Index ...... 9-1 Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subjectin this manual.You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
i We support voluntary technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, - WE SUPPORT PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the nam'e VOLUNTARY TECHNIC1AN TRANS SPORT are registered trademarks of General CERTIFICATION THROUIGH Motors Corporation, National Insti8tutefor AUTO~MOTIVE SERVICE This manual includes the latest information at thetime it EXCELLENCE was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Limited" for Pontiac For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a Division whenever it appears in this manual. French Language Manual: Please keep this manual in your Pontiac, so it will be Aux proprihtaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous there if you ever need it when you're on the road. If you procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frarqais chez sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new votre concessionaire ou au: owner can use it. DGN Marketing Services Ltd. I500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7
Litho in USA. 'Copyright General Motors Corporation 1996 Part No. 10273382 I3 First Edition All Rights Reserved ii How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning 1 A CAUTIO”’: to end whenthey first receive theirnew vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn ab’out the featuresand These mean thereis something that could hurt controls foryour vehicle. In this manual, you’ll ,find you or other people. that pictures and words work together to explain I things quickly. In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then
~ Index we tell you what to do to help avoid or reducethe A good place to look forwhat you need is theIndex in hazard. Please read these cautions.If you don’t, you or the back of the manual.It’s an alphabetical listof all others could be hurt. that’s in the manual, and the pagenumber where you’ll find it. You will also find a circle with a slash through it in Safety Warnings and Symbols this book. This safety symbol means“Don’t,” You will find a numberof safety cautions in this book. “Don’t dothis,” or “Don’t We use a box and theword CAUTION to tellyou let this happen.” about things that could hurtyou if you were to ignore the warning.
iii Vehicle Damage Warnings In the notice area,we tell you about somethingthat can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damagewould Also, in this book you will find these n'otices: not be coveredby your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tellyou what to do to help avoid NOTICE: the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION These mean thereis something thatcould and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words. damage your vehicle. You'll also seewarning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example, These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols are used on an for you and your lights: your controls: warning and you may see: original battery: your passengers indicator lights: whenever your vehicle is WINDSHIELD CAUTION driven: WIPER POSSIBLE A FUSE INJURY COOLANT - TEMP - PROTECT TURN EYES BY UNLOCK SIGNALS e t ESl BATTERY LIGHTER SHIELDING CHARGING SYSTEM CAUSTIC FASTEN WINDSHIELD HORN )cT SEAT DEFROSTER BRAKE BELTS (a) BURNS
COOLANT SPEAKER WINDOW b DEFOGGER a DAYTIME - RUNNING '. 0 ENGINE OIL LAMPS '** e,FUEL SPARK OR ,\I/, PRESSURE p3 FLAME COULD VENTILATING EXPCODE FOG LAMPS FAN ANTI-LOCK $0 BRAKES (e) BATTERY NOTES
vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Driver’s 4-Way Manual Seat Pontiac and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with and safetyair bags and belts. CAUTION: AAI Seats and Seat Controls You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis them, take them out, put them back in, and fold them up and down. moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. Manual Front Passenger Seat
The driver's seat can beadjusted four ways.
Use the lever on the front of the seat toadjust the seat This seat is used in the right frontpassenger position. forward or backward. Pull up on the lever on the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. To use, pull up the lever on the front of the seat to To make sure theseat is locked into place, release the unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. To make lever and try to move the seat with your body. sure the seat is locked into place, release the lever and try to move the seatwith your body, To raise the seat, pullup on the lever on the right side of the seat, To lower the seat, push the lever down.
1-2 Driver’s 6-Way Power Seat (Option) Rear Control (C): Raise the rear of the seat by holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the rear of the seat. Reclining Front Seatbacks
c
I
To adjust the driver’s six-way power seat: Front Control (A): Raise the front of the seat by To adjust the seatback, rotate the knob. It iseasier to holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower recline the seat if you lean forward, taking your weight the front of the seat. off of the seatback. Center Control (B): Move the seat forwardor backward by holding the controlto the front or back. Raise or lower the seat by holding the controlup or down.
1-3 Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in mo’tioncan be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined likethis, The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it wiIl be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt can’tdo its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces wouldbe there,not at your pelvic bones, This could cause serious internal injuries. But don’t havea seatback reclinedif your vehicle is moving. For proper protection when the vehicleis in motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seatand wear your safety belt properly.
I ~~ Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the topof your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Bench Seat Removing the Bench Seat If you have a rear bench seat, the seatback can be folded down. Also, the bench seat canbe removed or moved to a different floor location to provide extra storage space. Folding the Seatback
1. Make sure the seatbackis in the upright position, and that all safety belts areon the seat. 2. Lift the seatback latch release while folding the seatback forward. To fold down the seatback, lift the seatback latch release 3. From behind the bench seat, pullup the two rear while folding the seatback forward. levers, and lift the bench seat. To raise the seatback, lift the seatbacklatch release 4. Remove the bench seat from the vehicle. while raisingthe seatback untilit locks upright.Push and pull on the seatbackto check that it is locked. Replacing the Bench Seat
2. Push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins, then push down on the two leversto lock the rear of the Don’t put the bench seat in so it faces backward, bench in place. because it won’t latch that way. If you want more 3. Try to raise the bench seatto check thatit is locked down. storage roo’mbehind the seat, use the floor pins closer to I I the front of the vehicle. See “Adjusting Rear Seats” later in this section. I A CAUTION: 1. Place the front hooks of the bench seat latch onto the front floor pins. A seat that isn’t lockedinto place properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop, People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properlywhen installing it. 1-6 If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward ina sudden stopor crash. That could cause injuryto the person sitting there. Always press rearwardon the seatback to be sure it is locked.
4. Lift the seatback latch release and raise the seatback until it locks upright. 5. Push and pull on the seatback to check thatit is locked. Removable Rear Bucket Seats (Option) The rear bucket seats can be removed provide to extra storage. Each seat that has thebuilt-in child restraint option fitsin only one location inyour vehicle, but seats that don’t have the built-in child restraint becan moved to different floor locations. The backof each seathas a diagram (similarto the one pictured) that shows where the seat mustbe located in your vehicle. RIGHT ONLY seats that don’t have the built-in child restraint fitonly in the right locations.LEFT ONLY I seats that don’t have the built-in child restraint fit only in the left locations.The CENTER OR LEFT seat fitsin the center location and in either left location. RIGHT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraint option fitonly in the rear set of floor pins in the right lo’cationof the secondrow. LEFT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraintoption fit only in the rear set of floor pins in theleft location of the secondrow.
There are thee types of rear bucketseats: RIGHT ONLY, CENTER OR LEFT and LEFTONLY. RIGHT ONLY and LEFT ONLY seats may be equipped with the built-in child restraint option. Dump and Stow Feature To use this feature on CENTER OR LEFT or LEFT ONLY seats: Lift the upper lever to fold the seatback forward. Push down on the rear release bar (located behind the seat), and tilt the entire seat and seatback forward. \ \ \ To release the RIGHT ONLY seat from this position: \ Push the lower lever back, while you pull the entire seat \\ \ back to the upright position. Lift the upper lever to lift h\ i the seatback up again. Push and pull onthe seat and the seatback to be sure both are locked intoposition. To release the CENTER OR LEFT or LEFTONLY seat from thisposition: Pull the entire seat back to the upright position. Lift the upper lever to lift the seatback up again. Push and pull on the seat and the seatback to The second and third row bucket seats have been be sure both are locked into position. designed to allow them to foldfully upward and forward when the seats are anchored in the rear-most position. This design improves both luggagekargo capacity and rear seat entry/exit. To use this featureon RIGHT ONLY seats: Lift the upper lever to fold the seatback forward. Push the lower lever back and tilt the entireseat and seatback forward.
1-9 cltry to Third Row Bucket Seats
To get out of the third row seats,push down on the rear release bar under the seat aheadof you to tilt the entire The RIGHT ONLY seats havea lower leverto tilt the seat forward. seat forward.To get into thirdrow seats, push back the lower leveron the RIGHT ONLY seat (nearestthe sliding door) andtilt the seat forwardcompletely. To return the seatto its normal position,'pull the seat back, holding the lower leverback. Once the seatis in place, release the lowerlever. Push and pull on the seatbackto be sure thatit is locked.
1-10 Removing Rear Bucket Seats Removing the RIGHT ONLY Seats
3. From behind the seat, support the top portion of the seat with one hand as you squeeze the front release bar toward the crossbar. The seat will release from the floor pins. 1. Lift the upper lever to fold the seatback forward. 2. Push the lower lever back so the entire seat and seatback tilt forward. Removing LEFT ONLY and CENTER OR LEFT Seats
2. Push down on the rear release bar (l'ocatedbehind the seat)#,and tilt the entire seat forward.
1. Lift the upper lever to fold the seatback forward.
1-12 Adjusting Rear Seats
3. From behind the seat, support the top portion of the seat with one handas you squeeze the front release
bar toward the crossbar. The seat will release from I Each rearseat location has two sets of floor pins. Seats the floor pins. equipped with the built-in child restraint option must b'e secured in the rear set of floor pins. Seats that don't have the built-in child restraint can be secured in either set of floor pins. Move theposition of these seatsup or back to provide a little more roombehind or in frontof a seat.
1-13 Replacing Rear Bucket Seats
b
SECURELY LATCH SEAT IN LOCATION SHOWN. SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDmONAL INFORMATION.
Follow the diagram on theback of the seats to replace the seats in their proper location. The LEFT ONLY seats fitonly in the left positions. The RIGHT OmY seats fitonly in the right positions. The CENTER OR LEFT seat fitsin the centerposition and 1. With the entire seat tilted forward, place the front in either left position, hooks of the seat latchonto the front floor pins. Don't try to place the seatsin backward, b'ecausethey 2. Firmly press the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins. won't latchthat way. ,- The seat should lock into position. . . I ,'. .. .-r ..' 3. Push and pull 'on the seat to check that isit locked. 4. Lift the upper lever and pull up on the seatback until it locks upright. Push andpull on the seatback tobe sure that it is locked. 5. Check to see that you have put the seats into the proper location, accordingto the label on each seat. If not, the seatsmay not latchproperly, and your passengers may not havethe groper safety belt. 1-14 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts buckle up. (See “Safety properly. It also tells you some things you should not do Belt Reminder Light” in with safety belts. the Index.)
And it explains the SupplementalRestraint System . .. (SRS), or air bag system,
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she ca t wear In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and you’re not wearinga safety belt, your injuries You never know if you’ll be ina crash. If you do have a can be much worse. You can hit things inside the crash, you don’t knowif it will be a bad one. vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso injured or killed. In the same crash, you might serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. not be if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your But most crashes are in between. In many of them, safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk are fastened properly too. away. Without belts they could havebeen badly hurt or killed. After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts areclear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
1-15 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as 1 it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat on wheels.
1-16 Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something. doesn't stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-17 or the instrument panel ... or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces,That’s why safety belts make such good sense. Here Are QuestionsMany People Ask If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from About Safety Belts-- and the Answers home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident -- even onethat isn’t your fault -- you and accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety doesn’t protect you from things beyond your belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, control, such as bad drivers. even if you’re upside down. And your chance of Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of being conscious during and after an accident, so home. And the greatest number of serious injuries you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph you are belted. (65 kmh). @ If my vehicle hasair bags, why should I have to Safety belts are for everyone. wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckleup to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and other collisions.
1-19 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for peopleof adult size. Be aware thatthere are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies, If a child will be riding in your Pontiac, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. rirst, YOU’IL want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. Driver Position Thp@ .. &$€ribes thedriver’s restraint system. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Lapshoulder Belt Don’t let itget twisted. The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across it properly. you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back 1. Close and lock the door. slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckleuntil it clicks.
1-2u -. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt. end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see“Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section. Make sure the releasebutton on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever hadto.
1-21 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingth’e thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause seriousor even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces. The safety beltlocks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-22 &: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.
1-23 Q: What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if your beltis buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not theat pelvic bones. Thiscould cause ,serious internal injuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.
~~
I I I I I I I I
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-24 What’s wrong withthis?
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and thatcould cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-25 &= What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-26 &: What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it. , ,,...... '.$I -':,- I A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-27 Your Pontiac has an air bag for the driver. Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system: - You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt-- even if you have an airbag. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. The air bag is only a “supplemental restraint.” That is, it works with safety beltsbut doesn’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work onlyin moderate to severe crashes where the frontof your vehicle hits To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. something. Theyaren’t designed to inflate at in The belt should go back out of the way. all rollover, rear9side or low-speed frontal crashes. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the Everyone in your vehicle, includingthe driver, way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or belt and your vehicle. not there’s an air bag for thatperson. Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) I This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) or air bag system. 1-28 There is an air bag readiness CAUTION: light onthe instrument /i\ panel, which shows the words AIR BAG. Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating AIR BAG air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you in position for an air bag inflation in a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with an airbag, and sit as far back as you can while stillmaintaining control of your vehicle. I The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. 1-29 How the Air Bag System Works /I\ CAUTION: Don’t put anythingon, orattach anything to, the steering wheel.Also, don’t put anything (such as pets or objects) between the driverand the steering wheel.If so’methingis between an occupant and an air bag, could it affect the performance of the air bag -- or worse, it could cause injury. Where is the air bag? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-30 When should an air bag inflate? What makes anair bag inflate? The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe In a frontal or near-frontal impact of sufficient severity, frontal Nor near-frontal crashes. The air bag will inflate the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is only if the impact speed is abovethe system’s designed suddenly stopping as a result of a crash. The sensing “threshold level.” If your vehiclegoes straight into a system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide wall that doesn’t move or deform,the threshold level is sealed in the inflator. The reactionproduces nitrogen about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 krn/h). The threshold level gas, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that related hardware are all part of the airbag module it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your packed inside the steering wheel. vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such How does an air bag restrain? as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflatein rollovers, side In moderate to severefrontal or near-frontal collisions, impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel. help the occupant. The airbag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force ofthe impact In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping bag should have inflated simplybecause of the damage the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. help you in many types of collisions, including Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only one because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag. indication of this. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal collisions. 1-31 What will you see after am air bag inflates? 0 The airbag is designed to inflate only once. Afterit After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates.This occurs inflates, you’llneed some new parts for your air bag so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize the air system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system bag inflated. Some componentsof the airbag module in won’t be there to help protectyou in another crash. the steering wheel hub willbe hot for a short time.The A new system will include the air bag module and part of the bag that comes into contactwith you may be possibly other parts. The service manual foryour warm, but it will never be too hot to touch. There will be vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated0 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module, air bag. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver which records information about the air bag system. from seeingor~from being able tosteer the vehicle, nor The module records information about the readiness will it stop people from leaving the vehicle. of the system, when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usageat deployment. Let only qualified technicianswork on your air bag system. Irnproper service canmean that your aisbag system won’t work properly.See your dealer When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air. for service. This dust could cause breathing problems for people witha history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the NOTICE: vehicle should get out assoon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out If you damage the cover for the driver’sair bag, of the vehicle after anair bag inflates, then get it may not work properly. You may have to fresh air by opening a window or door. replace the air bag module. Do not open or break the air bag cover. 1-32 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy The air bag affects how your Pontiac should be serviced. Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant There are parts of the air bag system in several places women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your Pontiac dealer and the Trans Sport Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications’’ in the Index. I For up to two minutesafter the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape, or yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure tofollow proper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you is qualified to do so. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The airbag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-33 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Rear Seat Outside PassengerPositions mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making n safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Positilon The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position’’ earlier in this secti’on. Rear Seat Passengers It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the re& seat are hurt more often in crashesthan those whoare wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. 1-34 Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. If the belt stops before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. Don’t let it get twisted. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the you very quickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back release button on the buckle is positioned so you would slightly to unlock it. Thenpull the belt across you be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever more slowly. had to. 1-35 3. To make the lap parttight, pull down on the buckle The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. I A CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 1-37 Center PassengerPosition Lap Belt (Bench Seat) If your vehicle has a rear bench seat, someone can sit in the center position. When you sit in the center position of the bench seat, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. 1-38 Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Lap Belt Buckle, position and release it thesame way as the lap If your vehicle has bucket seats, someonecan sit in the part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, center position bucket seat. see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section. Make sure therelease button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-39 When you sit in the centerposition bucket seat, you 4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part have a lap safety belt which has a retractor. of a lap-shoulder belt. 1. Pick up the latch plate and, in a single motion, pull If the beltisn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt the belt across you. Don’t let itget twisted. Extender’’ at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned you 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If so would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, let it go you had to. back into the retractor all theway and start again. ever Pull up on thelatch plate to make sure it is secure. 3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it, 1-40 Children Everyone ina vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smallerthan adult size. In fact, SECURELY LATCH SEAT IN LOCATION the law in every state in the United States and in every SHOWN.SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR -1- INFORMATION.[ ADDITIONAL Canadian province says childrenup to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies The center position bucket seat isa CENTER OR LEFT type seat. Because it isthe only bucket seat with a lap belt, and has a buckle on only one side, there are certain places a CENTER ORLEFT typebucket seat should, U and should not, be used. See “Seats” in the Index. If the I CENTER OR LEFT bucket seat is used on the left side Smaller children and babies should always be of the vehicle, the person sitting there should use the restrained in a child or infant restraint. The lap-shoulder belt. It works the same way as the driver’s instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is safety belt. See “Driver Position” in the Index. the right type and size for yourchild. A very young child’ship bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe child’s abdomen.In a crash, thebelt would apply . .. force right on the child’s abdomen, which could . .. - ,. cause seriousor fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is alwaysproperly restrained in a child or infantrestraint. heavy you can't hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly b'ecome a 240-1b. (110 kg) force on your arms. Thebaby would be almost impossible to hold. Secure the baby in an infant restraint. I 11Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so CAUTION: (Continued) Built-in Child Restraint (Option) Each seat that has the built-in child restraint option fits in only one locationin your vehicle. To find outwhere a seat that has a built-in child restraint must be located in your vehicle, see “RemovableRear Bucket Seats” in the Index. If you have a rear seat with the optional built-in child restraint, refer to this picture to become familiar with the parts of each child seatand five-point harness listed below. A. Child Head Restraint B . Head Restraint Release Strap C. Shoulder Harness Straps D. Shoulder Harn’essClip E. Removable Pad E Seat Belt Latch Plates G. Buckle H. Seat Belt Buckle Release Button (Red) I. Shoulder Harness Release Strap (Black) J. Shoulder Harness Adjustment Strap (Grey) K. Child Restraint Cushion This child restraint system conformsto all applicable Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standards. This child restraintis designed foruse only by children who weigh between 20 and 40 pounds (9 and 18 kg) and whose height is 40 inches (102 cm) or lessand who are capable of sitting upright alone. In addition, the child shouldbe one year old ormore and at least 28 inches (71 cm) in height.It is important to use an approved, rear-facing infant restraint afor full year to allow the neckand spine to develop enough to support the weightof the child’s head in the eventof a collision. To make sure that the childis tall enough, compare the child’s standing height tothe top surfaceof the bucket seat, which is about 29 inches (74 cm) from thefloor. 1-44 five-point harness system.If a child’s shoulders are higher than the shoulder belt anchorages whileusing the five-point harness, the spine could be injured in a collision. WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOWTHE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEM CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUST THEBELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD. Just likethe other restraint systemsin your vehicle, your built-in child restraintneeds to be periodically checked The booster seat can be used by children over 40 lbs. and may need to haveparts replaced after a crash. See (1 8 kg) or whose shoulders areabove the shoulder belt “Checking Your Restraint Systems”and “Replacing Seat anchorages of the five-point childrestraint harness. The and Restraint System Parts Aftera Crash” in the Index. vehicle’s lap-shoulder belt is used instead of the 1-45 Using the Built-in Child Restraint The child head restraint is not foruse by an adult. Use of this head restraintby an adult could result in injury inthe event of a collision. i 1. Pull the child head restraint release strap and raise the head restraint until you hear the latch click. 1-46 L 2. Lower the child restraint cushion. 3. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, add slack to the shoulder harness. Pull the black shoulder harness releasestrap firmly. At the same timepull both shoulder harness straps through theslots in the seatback as shown. 1-47 4. Separate the halvesof the shoulder hamess clip. 5. Place the child in the chlld restraint and put a shoulder harness strap over each shoulder. Insert both seat belt latch plates intothe buckle and pull up on them to make sure they are firmly latched. Be sure that the seat belt buckleis free of foreign objects thatmay prevent you from properly latching the latch plates.If an object is in the opening, see your Pontiac dealer forservice before using the child restraint. L 6. Fasten thetwo halves of the shoulder harness clip 7. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap(grey) together and put it 2 to 3 inches (5 to 8 cm) below firmly untilthe shoulder harness strapsare snug the child’s chin. The purposeof the clip is to keep against the child’s shoulders. the shoulder harness straps positioned correctlyon 8. To release the child fromthe harness, separate the the shoulders. halves of the shoulder harness clip. Thenpush the red release button in thebuckJe. Move the shoulder harness strapsto the side and removethe child. If you expect thatthe child will sleep while riding,a U-shaped pillow that supports the child’s chin may be helpful in providing additionalcomfort. Such devices may be found in the child restraint sectionof major toy stores or other stores wherechildre ; access0 3 are sold. Storing the Built-in Child Restraint 2. Unlatch the child head restraintby pulling the release strap. Lower the head restraint and pressfirmly it into 1. Make sure that the crotch strap is held flush to the the seatback until you hear the latch click. child restraint cushion with the fastener strip. Also be sure the shoulder harness adjustment strap (grey) is folded up in the seat.This will allow the cushion to fold completely into the seatback. Raise the cushioaa. Using as a Booster Seat 2. Lower the child restraint cushion. 1. Pull the head restraint release strap and raisethe head restraint untilyou hear the latch click. A CAUTION: The child head restraint is not for useby an adult. Useof this head restraintby an adult could res& in injury in the eventof a collision. 1-51 L 3. Store the five-point childrestraint harness behind 4, Place the child on the cushion and fasten the vehicle the removablepad. The pad is held in placeby lap-shoulder belt around the child. fastener strips. 5. To release the childfrom the vehicle lap-shoulder belt, push thered button on the buckle. Child Restraints Where to Put the Restraint Be sure the child restraint is designed toused be in a Accident statisticsshow that children are saferif they vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that itmeets are restrained in the rear ratherthan the front seat.We 'at Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. General Motors therefore recommendthat you put your child restraint in the rear seat unless the childis an Then follow the instructions for the restraint.You may infant and you're the only adult in the vehicle,that In find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a case, you might want to secure the restraint in the front booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in seat whereyou can keepan eye on thebaby. your vehicle, but the child also hasto be secured within the restraint to help reducethe chance of personal injury. Wherever you install it,be sure to secure the child The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint properly. restraint will show you how to do that. Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move aroun'd ina collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. 1-53 Top Strap There’s a vinyl sleeve there; to get to the bracket, gush this vinyl sleeve aside slightly. Anchor the top strap to If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be the bracket. If your vehicle does not have third row seats anchored. If your vehicle has third row seats, anchor and belts, or if you need to have an anchor bracket brackets fur the second row outside positions are located installed for any additional passenger seat position, you just above the place where the third row lap-shoulder can ask your Pontiac dealer to put it in for you. If you belts meet thefloor. want to install an anchor bracket yourself, yourdealer can tell you how to do it. Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. 1-54 Securing a Child Restraint inan Outside 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or Seat Position around the restraint, The child restraintinstructions will show you how. n You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Tilt the latch plate to adjust beltthe if needed. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions If the shoulderbelt goes in front of the child’s face or for the child restraint. neck, put it behind the child restraint. 2. Secure the childin the child restraint as the instructions say. __ 1-55 4. Buckle the belt. Make surethe release button is 5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the you push down on the child restraint. safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 6. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sure it is secure, To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety beltand let it go back all. the way. The safetybelt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-56 I Securing a Child Restraintin the Center Seat Position (BenchSeat) n You’ll be using the lap belt. 1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pullingit along the belt. See the earlier part about the top strapif the child restraint has one. 2. Put the restrainton the seat,Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraintas the instructions say. 4. Run thevehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions willshow you how. 1-57 6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions tobe sure it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the restraint in a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraintmaker for their advice about how to attach the childrestraint properly. To remove thechild restraint, just unbucklethe vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to wqrk ~QSrn ad4lt.arlarger child passenger. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-58 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Seat Position (Bucket Seat) 3. Pull the lap belt all the way out without stopping. You'll be using the lap belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 4. While holding it out, run the belt through or around the child restraint. The childrestraint instructions 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions will show you how. for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 6. To tighten the belt, feed it back into the retractor positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the while YOU push down on the child restraint. safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go b'ack all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-60 Larger Children If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child canwear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash. Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are. Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. Never do this. Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, thetwo children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time. Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but thechild isso small that the shoulderbelt is very closeto the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in the center seatposition, the one that has only a lap belt. 1-62 CAUTION: IA Never do this. Here a child issitting in a seat that hasa lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash thechild might slide under thebelt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits, the lapportion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. 1-63 Safety Belt Extender If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint,torn or frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces If the vehicle’s safety beltwill fasten you, around you just like tornor frayed safety belts can. They may not should use it. protect a child ina crash. If a harness strap is torn or But if a safety belt isn’t long enoughto fasten, your frayed, get a new harness rightaway. dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go Also look forany opened or broken air bag covers,and in to order it, take the heaviest coatyou will wear, so the have them repairedor replaced. (The airbag system extender will be long enough€or you. The extender will does not need regular maintenance.) be just for you, and just€or the seat inyour vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else useit, and use it Replacing Restraint System Parts only forthe seat it is made tofit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. After a Cras’h If you’ve had a crash, do you need new safety belts or Checking Your Restraint Systems built-in child restraint parts? Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light After a very minor collision, nothing bemay necessary. But if and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand the safety beltsor built-in child restraint harness straps were anchorages are workingproperly. If your vehicle hasa stretched, as they wouldbe if worn during a more severe built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the crash, then you need newsafety belts or harness straps. harness straps, latch plates,buckle, clip, childhead restraint and anchorages are working properly. Look for If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness arestraps cut any other looseor damaged safety belt and built-in child or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean restraint systemparts. If you see anythingthat might you will need to havesafety belt, built-in child restraint or keep a safety beltor built-in child restraint system from seat parts repairedor replaced. Newparts and repairs may be doing its job, have it repaired. necessary #even ifthe safety belt or built-in child restraint wasn’t being usedat the time of the collision. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is If an air bag dates, you’ll need to replaceair bag system torn or frayed, geta new #one rightaway. parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section. 1-64 Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn aboutthe many standard and optional features on your Pontiac, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and thewarning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem. Keys Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerousfor many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windowsor other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keysin a vehicle with young children. 2-1 The ignition keysare for the When a new Trans Sportis delivered, the dealer ignition only. removes the plugs from the keys, and givesthem to the first owner. Each plughas a coldeon it that tells your dealer ora qualified locksmithhow to make extra keys. Keepthe plugs in a safe place.If you lose your keys,you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using theseplugs. If you need a new ignition key, contact your Pontiac dealer who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the pre-cut emergency doorkey which Pontiac sends after delivery.In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at1 -800-ROADSIB or 1-800-762-3743. The door keys are €or the doors and all other locks. I NOTICE: Your Pontiac has a number of new features that can help prevent theft.But you can havea lot of trouble getting into your vehicleif you ever lock your keys inside.You may even haveto damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys. 2-2 Front Doors Door Locks Pay attention when you openor close thesedoors Unlocked doors canbe dangerous. from the outside. Stay clear of the upper rear Passengers -- especially children -- can easily corner to avoid hitting your head. open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it. Outsiders can easily enter throughan unlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. . This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will befar better off whenever you drive your vehicle. 7 There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use your door keyor the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter (if your vehicle hasthis option). 2-3 To lock the door fromthe inside, slidethe locking lever rearward. From the inside, press the front of the power door To unlock the door, slide the locking lever forward. lock switch (on either frontdoor) to unlock all doors and the liftgate. You can lock all doors and the liftgate fromthe inside by pressing the rear of the powerlock switch on either front door. 24 - - If you have the optional Remo’te Keyless Entry system, To lock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch, the your vehicle has a special security feature.If the driver’s optional Remote Keyless Entry transmitter, lock or it door is open and your key is in the ignitionin the OFF manually by turning the lock counterclockwise. position, youwon’t be able to set thedoor locks with the power door lock switch or the remote transmitter. This Automatic Door Locks (Option) feature is designed to help keepyou from locking your With this feature, you can unlock allof the doors from keys inyour vehicle. the outsideby holding the key in theunlock position for If the sliding door is open whenyou press thepower one second.To unlock only the driver’s or passenger’s door lock switch, it will lock automaticallywithin five door, turn the key to the unlockposition and release. seconds after you close it. From the inside, when the ignitionon is and the driver’s If you have the optional Remote Keyless Entry system, door is closed, all doors will lock each timeyou move this feature will be replaced by a different lock delay the shift lever outof PARK (P). If the passenger door or system. See “Remote Keyless Entry” laterin this section. the liftgate is openwhen you move the shift lever outof PARK (P), they will lock when closed. With power locks, when the doors are locked, the insideas well as the outside door latch release cannot openthe If the slidingdoor is open whenyou move the shift lever doors. This safety feature preventsa door from being out of PARK (P) or manually lock the doorsusing the accidentally opened from the inside by moving the handle. power door lock switches,a lock delay feature allows the sliding door to lock five seconds afterit is closed. To override this safety feature, slide the locking leverto All other doors will lock again, too. the unlock position on the dooryou want to open. With the automaticdoor locks feature,you can still lock When the liftgate hasbeen unlocked with the power or unlock the doors anyat time, either manually orwith door locks, you won’t need the key to open it. Simply the power door lock switches. turn the lock clockwiseuntil the latch releases. Thisis also true if you use the optional Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. See “RemoteKeyless Entry” later in this section. 2-5 Overriding Lock Delay Unlock the Driver’s DoorOnly: To program the automatic door locks systemto unlock only the driver’s To override the lock delay feature, press the front of the door when the shift lever is returned to PARK (P), press power door lock switch (theunlock position) while the the unlock symbol on your remotetransmitter once. The shift lever is inPARK (P). driver’s door will unlock, indicating that this mode has If you have the Remote Keyless Entry system, been successfully programmed. there are three additionalways you can disable the Unlock All Doors: To program the automatic door lock delay feature (see “Remote Keyless Entry” locks system to unlock all doors when the shiftlever is later in this section): returned to PARK (P), press the unlock symbol on Press the unlock symbol on your remote transmitter, your remote transmitter once (thedriver’s door will Return the shift lever to PARK (P) or unlock), then press the unlock symbol again. All doors will unlock, indicating that this mode has been Turn the ignition off. successfully programmed. Customizing Your Automatic Door Locks Feature All Doors Remain Locked: To program the automatic door locks system to leave all doorslocked With the Remote Keyless Entry system, you can when the shift lever isreturned to PARK (P), press customize your automatic door locks feature to suit your the lock symbol on your remote transmitter once. All individual needs. (See “RemoteKeyless Entry” later in doors will lock, indicating that this mode has been this section.) successfully programmed. With the doors closed and the ignition on, press and hold Disengage the AutomaticDoor Locks System: To the driver’s power door lock switch in the lock position disengage the automatic door locks system, press the for 10 seconds. The doors will lock, then unlock, lock symbol on your remotetransmitter once (all doors indicating that ‘you have10 seconds in which to program will lock). Then press the lock symbol again. All doors one ‘of four custom modes: will lock again, indicating that this mode has been succ’essfullyprogrammed. 2-6 You can reprogram the automatic door locks system at Keyless Entry System (Option) any time. If you do not program the automaticdoor locks system, all doorswill remain locked when the shift If your Pontiac has this option, you can lock and unlock lever is returned to PARK (P). your doors or unlock your liftgate from up to30 feet (9 m) away using the key chain transmitter supplied If you have more than one remote transmitter your for with your vehicle. vehicle, your automatic door locks systemwill operate as programmed with any of them. Thereis no need to program each one individually. Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving thevehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get outand close thedoor. Your Keyless Entry System operates ona radio. frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules. 2-7 This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, The driver’s doorwill unlock and the interior lamps will and (2) This devicemust accept any interference go on when the unlock symbolis pressed (see received, including interference thatmay cause “Illuminated Entry System” laterin this section). If undesired operation. pressed again within’five seconds,all doors and the liftgate will unlock. All doors and the liftgatewill lock Should interference to this systemoccur, try this: when the lock symbol is pressed. Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. If the driver’sdoor is open and your key is in the See the instructions on battery replacement. ignition in theOFF position, you won’t be able to setthe 0 Check the distance.You may be too far from your door lockswith the power door lock switchor the vehicle. This product hasa maximum range. remote transmitter. This security featureis designed to help keep you from locking your keys in your vehicle. Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. See your Pontiac dealer ora qualified technician €or service. Changes or modificationsto this system by other than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment. 2-8 Lock Delay Remote Operationof the the Power Sliding Door This lock delay feature can beoperated using either the (Option) remote key chain transmitter or the power door lock switch (see “Power Door Locks” earlier in this section). For the lock delay feature to work, the ignition and the interior lamps control (located to the left of the instrument panel cluster) must be off. If you wish to lock the doors with the interior lamps on, press the lock symbol or the rear of either power door lock switch twice. If any door is open when you press the lock symbol or the rear of either power door lock switch, a chime will sound three times. This indicates that all doors and the liftgate will lock about fiveseconds after the last door has been closed. To override the lock delay feature, press the lock symbol If you have the optional powersliding door (see “Power or the rear of either power door lock switch again, and Sliding Door” later in this section),your remote the do’orsand liftgate will lock immediately. If the transmitter will have a third button that has a van sliding door is open, it will lock automatically within symbol on it. Press it to open or closethe sliding door. five seconds after it is closed. If the sliding door is locked, first press the unlock To cancel the lock delay feature, press the unlock symbol twice to unlock all doors, then press the van symbol or the front of either power door lock switch. symbol to open the sliding door. You can operate the power sliding door with the remote transmitter only when the power sliding door ON/OFF switch on the overhead console is in the ON position. 2-9 Matching Transmitter@)To Your .Vehicle Replacing the Batteryin the Remote Transmitter Each key ch’aintransmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it. Battery Replacement Under normal use, the battery in your key chain transmitter should last about twoyears. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in anylocation. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, I. Insert a coin into the slot in the back of the it’s probably time to change thebattery. transmitter and turn it counterclockwise to open the cover, 2. Remove the cover. 3. Remove and replace the 3-voltbattery (CR2032). 4. Reassemble the transmitter. 5. Check the transmitter operation. 2-10 Illuminated Entry System (Option) Sliding Door This option comes with the optional RemoteKeyless Entry system. When you open the driver’s door, by itself or in combination with any passenger door or the liftgate, the interior lamps will come on and then gradually dim to off, 10 seconds after the last door is closed. (If the driver’s door has not been opened, the interior lamps will immediately dim to off.) When you press the unlock symbol on your remote transmitter, the lamps inside yourvehicle will go on, then gradually dim to off after 40 seconds, unless a door or the liftgate is opened. When you turn on the ignition, the interior lamps will immediately dim to off. To open the sliding door from outside thevehicle, pull the front of the latch release out and then toward the rear. If you slide the door all theway back, it will latch in theopen position. Sliding Door Lock To move the door forward, you must first pull the inside or outside latch release out and then forward or the door will remain latched in the open position. Lock the sliding door from inside thevehicle by moving the manual locking lever down. Unlock it by msvirag the lever up. If you have the optionalpower door locks, the sliding door lock has a delay feature. See “Power Door Locks” in the Index. - .. ’- ,2912 - Power Sliding Door (Option) Leaving young childrenor pets unattended in your vehicle can be dangerous. They could operate the power slidingdoor. A child or others could be injured.Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. To operate the power sliding door, thepower sliding door ON/OFF switchmust be in the ON position. This switch is located on the edgeof the overheadconsole. If you have the optional overhead console,the switch is the forward-most of the two powerdoor switches, To disable the power sliding door feature, slidethe switch With this option,you can open and close thepower to OFF. sliding door with switches insideyour vehicle. If you When your vehicle goes through an automatic carwash, have the optional Remote KeylessEntry system, you be sure the power sliding door ON/OFF switchis in the can also operate thepower sliding door with your OFF position. remote transmitter. See “Keyless Entry”in the Index. 2- 13 When the key is in the ignition in the RUN position, the power sliding door will only open if the transaxle is in PARK (PI. The transaxle does not have to be in PARK (P) to close the door. If the ON/OFF switch is in the ON position and the power sliding door is open or in the process of closing wh’enyou shift out of PARK (P), a buzzer will sound and the sliding door lighton your instrument panel will flash (see “Power Sliding Door Warning Light” in the Index ). This is a warning that the sliding dooris not completely closed. To open or closethe sliding door, press and release one of two PWR DOOR switches. One is mounted on the If you shift the transaxle outof PARK (P) and wall, just in front of the sliding door. The other switch is accelerate before the power sliding door latches located between the reading lamps onthe compact closed, the doormay reverse to the open position. overhead console. If you have theoptional overhead A child or others could fall outof the vehicle and console, the other switch is on the side of the overhead be injured. Alwaysmake sure the power sliding console, in the rear-most position. door is closed and latched before you drive away. The sliding door must be unlocked for it to operate. The key does not have to be in the ignition. To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door, disable the power sliding door by placing the power sliding door ON/OFF switch in the OFF position. 2-14 You or others could be injured if caughtin the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing thedoor. Objects caught in the path of the power sliding door may be damaged. Make sure thedoor path is clear before closing the door. To manually open the power sliding door when the sliding door ON/OFF switch is inthe ON position, pull the inside or outsidelatch release and let go; the door If anything obstructs the power sliding door while it is will open fully. closing, the door will automatically reverse to the open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. To manually open the power sliding door when the Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing ON/OFF switch is in the OFF position, pull the inside or door, or stronger. The force of the closing door increases outside latch release and slide the door all the way back. significantly as the door approaches the latch position. 2-15 ~ If your vehiclei,s facing downward ona steep grade (20% or more), the doormay not stay open and could slamshut, possibly injuring someone. To make sure thedoor does not slam shut, turn the enable switchON. Then if the d'oor closes,it will close under the control the of plower door system. To manually close the power sliding door when the sliding door ON/OFF switch isin the ON position,pull the inside or outside latch release or the edge of the door. Move the door about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position and release. The door will close completely and latch for you. To manually close the power sliding door when the ONIOFF switch is in the OFF position, pull the inside or outside latch release and slide the door all the way forward tothe latch position. 2-16 Resetting the Power SlidingDoor 1. Check to be sure the power sliding door unlocked is and securely closed. The power sliding doormay operate incorrectly ornot all because of the following conditions: 2. Turn the ignition switch tothe OFF position. 0 A low voltage or dead battery 3. Turn the power sliding door ON/OFF switchto OFF. 0 Disconnecting the battery 4. Remove theTAIL fuse from the fusepanel. Leave it If the GAUGES, TAIL or TURN B/U fuse is out for30 seconds. removed or blown. 5. Reinstall the fuseand wait 10 seconds. See “FusePanel” in the Index for more information 6. Move the ON/OFF switch to theON position. about your fuse panel. 7. Push eitherof the PWR DOOR buttonsto open the If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door power sliding door. will need to be reset. To do this, follow, the directions 8. Wait five seconds and close thedoor by pushing listed here. Itwill be easier if you read through them either PWR DOOR button. once before beginning this procedure. 9. Wait five seconds and repeat Steps7 and 8. If the door does not rest in the fully open position after repeating Step7, repeat Steps 7 and 8 again. If the door still doesnot operate correctly, seeyour dealer for service. 2-17 Sliding Door Child Security Lock Your Pontiac is equipped with a sliding door child security lock that helps preventyoung children or other passengers from opening the sliding door from the inside. If you have the optionalpower sliding door, you can override the security lockby pressing either PWR DOOR switch when thepower sliding door ON/OFF switch is in the ON position, See “Bower Sliding Door” earlier in the section. c The security lock lever islocated on the inside of the sliding door, near therear edge of the door. To access the lever, open the sliding door. Use the security lock label on the rear edge of the door as a guide. Reach around the inside rear corner of the sliding door to access the lever. To use the security lock, move the security lock lever all the way up and close the door from the outside. If you have the optional power slidingdoor, slide the power sliding door ON/OFF switch on the overhead console tothe OFF position. The power sliding door cannot be opened from the insidewhen this feature is in use. Canceling the SlidingDoor Lock 1. Unlock the sliding doorfrom the inside and open the door fromthe outside. 2. Move the security lock lever all theway clown. The slidingdoor lock willnow work normally. Liftgate Open the liftgate using the handlerecessed above the license plate. Onceslightly opened, the liftgatewill rise by itself. Lamps in the liftgate will come on, illuminating the rear cargo area (see “RearInterior Lamps” in the Index). NOTICE: If you want to open the sliding door when the security lock is on, unlock the sliding door from the insideand Be sure there areno overhead obstructions, such ‘open thedoor from the outside. as a garage door, beforeyou open the liftgate. If you have the optional power sliding door, slidethe You could slam the liftgate into something and power sliding doorON/OFF switch to theON position. break the glass. Press eitherPWR DOOR switch. You should let adults and older children knowhow the security lock works, andhow to cancel the lock.If you don’t, adultsor older children who ridein the rear won’t be able to open the sliding door fromthe inside when the security lock featureis in use. 2-19 I It can be dangerous to drivewith the liftgate open becausecarbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and theliftgate: Make sure all windows are shut. nrnthe fan on your heating or cooling To close theliftgate, pull down on the handle, then system to its highest speed withthe setting firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate on BI-LEV (Bi-Level)or UPPER. That will open, even slightly. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. force outsideair into your vehicle. See A light onyour instrument panel will warn you if the “Comfort Controls” in theIndex. liftgate is not completely closed (see “Liftgate Ajar If you have air outlets on or under the Warning Light” in the Index). instrument panel, open them all the way. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. 2-20 I Liftgate Lock Theft Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your Pontiac hasa number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so don’t do it. When you park your Pontiac and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime remindingyou to remove your key from theignition and take it withyou. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition and transaxle. And rememberto lock the doors. To unlock the liftgate, insert the door key and.turnthe lock clockwise. The liftgate willautomatically lock when you close it. If you have the optional power door locks, the liftgate will lock and unlock differently. See “Power Door Locks” in the Index. 2-21 Parking at Night New Vehicle “Break-InSS Park ina lighted spot, close all windows and lock your ~~~~~ ~ ~ vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area,or take them with you. NOTICE: Parking Lots Your modern Pontiac doesn’t need an elaborate If you park in a lot where someonewill be watching “break-in.” But it will perform betterin the long your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. run if you follow these guidelines: But what if you have to leave yourignition key? What if 0 Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or you have to leave somethingvaluable in your vehicle? slow -- for the first500 miles (804 km). Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove Don’t make full-throttle starts. box or locking storage bin. rn Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time 0 Lock the storage bin. your new brake linings aren’t yet broken Lock all the doors except the driver’s. in. Hard stops with new linings can mean 0 Then take the door key with you. premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get newbrake linings. 0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See C‘Towinga Trailer” in the Index for more information, Ignition Positions LOCK (B): This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn and transaxle. the switch to five positions. OFF (C): This position unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and transaxle, but does not send electrical C power to any accessories. Use this position ify~~r vehicle must be pushed or towed,but never try to push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if you open the driver's door when the ignition is OFF and the key is in the ignition. RUN (D): This is an on position to which the switch returns after you start your engineand release the switch. The switch stays in th'e RUN position when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not A E running, you can use the RUN position to operate your electrical power accessories, and todisplay some instrument panel warning lights. START (E): This position starts the engine. When the ACCESSORY (A): An on position in which you can engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will operate your electrical power accessories. Press in the return to the RUN position for normaldriving. ignition switch as you turn the top of it toward you. Note that even if the engine is not running, the positions ACCESSORY and RUN are onpositions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio. 2-23 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your NOTICE: ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. Theidle speed will go down as your engine If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t gets warrn. turn it, be sure it is all the way in. If it is, then turn the steering wheel left anldright while you NOTICE: turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break Holding your key in START for longer than the key or the ignition switch.If none of this 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe works, then your vehicle needs service. drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. St’artingYour Engine ~~~ ~ ~~~~~ 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in START. Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If it doesn’t stamt in three seconds (or starts but then Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a stops), push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, the way down for 12 more seconds, or until it starts. use NEUTRAL (N) only. 3. If you engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it coul’dbe flooded with too much gasoline. Try this: Wait 15 seconds to let the startermotor cool down. Then push your accelerator pedalall the way to the Don’t try to shift to PARK (P)if your Pontialc floor. Hold it there. Then hold the key in START. This is moving. If you do, you could damage the clears the extra gasolinefiom the engine. When the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P)only when your engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator vehicle is stopped. pedal. If the engine still doesn’tstart, wait another 15 seconds and repeat this step. 2-24 Engine Coolant Heater (Option) NOTICE: Your engineis designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, checkwith your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. If you everhave to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells howto do it without damagingyour vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. In very cold weather, 0 “F (- 18 O C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. To use the coolant heater: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 11O-volt AC outlet. Automatic Transaxle Operation A CAUTION: There are several different positions for your shift lever. Plugging the cord intoan ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat‘and cause a fire. You coul’dbe s’eriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If’the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for PARK (P): This locks your front wheels.It’s the best at least15 amps. position to use when you start your engine becauseyour vehicle can’t move easily. 4. After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to Ensure the shift leveris fully in PARK (P) before store the cord as it was before to keep kt away starting the engine. Your Pontiac has a Brake-Transaxle from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could Shift Interbck (BTSI). You have to fully apply your be damaged. regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged when the ignition key is in the RUN position. As you in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the step on the brakepedal, while inPARK (P), you may kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of hear a click from the solenoid of the BTSI. This ensures trying to list everythinghere, we ask that you contact that the BTSI isoperating properly. your Pontiac dealer in the areawhere you’ll be parhng If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on your vehicle. The dealer can giveyou the best advice for the shift Iever -- push the shift lever all theway into that particular area. PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever intothe gear you wish, See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this section, 2-26 i REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up. F-- NOTICE: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the Shifting to REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. moving forward could damage your transaxle. Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engine is Shift to REVERSE (R)only after yourvehicle running unless you have to.If you have left the is stopped. engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see level ground, always set your parking brake and “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor Snow” in the Index. move the shift lever to PARK (P). NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use the Index. NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. . .”. - 5 .. < ’.. , I. .-,I . . ,I. ” 2-27 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@): This position is CAUTION: for normal driving, If you need more power for passing, A and you’re: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while e Going less than 35 rnph (56 kdh), push your your engine is “racing” (running athigh speed) is accelerator pedal about halfway down. dangerous. Unless yourfoot is firmlyon the 0 Going about 35 mph (56 Wh)or more, push the brake pedal,your vehicle could move very accelerator all the way down. rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. objects, Don’t shiftout of PARK (P) or THIRD (D): This position is also used for normal NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing, driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a). Here are some timesyou might chooseTHIRD (D) NOTICE: instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@): When driving on hilly, winding roads, Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine between gears). racing isn’t covered by your warranty. When going down a steep hill. 2-28 SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. NOTICE: It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or your brakes off and on. if it seems not to shift gears asyou go faster, something may be wrong witha transaxle system NOTICE: sensor. If you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have Don’t drive inSECOND (2) for more than 25 miles your vehicle serviced right away. Untilthen, you (41 km), or at speeds over 55 mph (88 km/h), or can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less you can damage your transaxle.Use THIRD @) than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (D) for or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (69)as much as higher speeds. possible. Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h) or you FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power can damage your engine. (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it onvery steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. If the selector leveris put in FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. 2-29 Parking Brake NOTICE: If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happenif you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat anddamage the transaxle. Use your brakesor shift into PARK (I?) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. ..~,. To set theparking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See“Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. To release the parkng brake, hold the regular brake Shifting Into PARK (P) pedal down with your right foot while you push down on the parking brake pedal with your left foot. (To I release the tension on the parking brake cable, you will need to apply about the same amount of pressure to the parking brake pedal as you did when you set the parhng brake.) When you remove yourfoot from the parking It can be dangerous to getout of your vehicle if brake pedal, it will pop up to the release position. the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle NOTICE: can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even Driving withthe parking brake on can cause when you’re on fairly level ground, usethe steps your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see replace them, and you could alsodamage other “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. parts of your vehicle. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Thatsection shows set the parking brake with your left foot. what to do first to keep the trailer from moving. 2-31 ,-*.*:.-. 2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position Move the lever up as far as it will go. like this: 3.' Move the ignition key to the LOCK position. 0 Pull the lever toward you. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle withthe ignition keyin your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). 2-32 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Torque Lock Engine Running If you are parking on a hill and you don't shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called "torque lock." Tu It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the prevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift engine running. Your vehicle could move into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver's suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) seat. To find out how, see "Shifting Into PARK (P)" in the Index. with the parking brake firmly set. And;if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of overheat and even catch fire.You or others could PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. be injured. Don't leave your vehicle with the If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another engine running unless you have to. vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the transaxle, so you can pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure yourvehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it.After you've moved the shift lever into the PARK (P) position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, seeif you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, itmeads that the shift lever wasn't fully locked into PARK (P). Shifting Out of PARK (P) Parking Over Things That Burn Your Pontiac hasBrake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI):).Yurr have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P), when the ignition is in the RUN position. See “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in theIndex. As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the solenoid of the BTSI. This ensures that the BTSI is operating properly. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift l’ever-- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you want, If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. and hold the brake until the end Step 2. Apply of 4. I 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear you want. Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust 5, Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can. parts underyour vehicle and ignite. Don9 park over pagers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. 2-34 Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You’re Parked CAU It’s better not to park with the engine running.But if you A ever haveto, here are some thingsto know. Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death. You might haveexhaust coming in if: Idling the engine with the air system controloff Your exhaust system sounds strange could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle or different. (see the earlier Cautionunder ‘!Engine Exhaust”). Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. carbon monoxide(CO) into your vehicle evenif the Your vehicle was damaged when driving fan switchis at the highest setting. One placethis over high points on the roador over can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with CO -- can road debris. come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the Repairs weren’t done correctly. engine running. Your vehicle or exhaust system had been Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See modified improperly. “Blizzard” in the Index.) If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: @ Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and Have your vehicle fixed immediately. Windows Manual Windows It can bedangerous to get out of your vehicle if Use the manual crank to open and close the the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the front windows. parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. Power Windows (Option) Don’t leaveyour vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shiftlever to PARK (P). Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. If you have power windows,the switches on the d!river’s dolor armrest control thefront windows (when the ignition is on). The left switch controls the driver’s window. The right switch controls the passenger’s window. 2-36 The driver’s power window switch has two down Side Window Latches positions. Hold the rear of the switch in the first position to lower the window normally. I To activate the auto-down feature, fully press the rear of the switch, then release. The window will lower completely. To stop the window from loweringall the way, press the front of the switch. To raise thewindow, press and hold the front of the switch. The rearof the side windows swings open. To open, pull the latch forward torelease it, then swing the window outward. Press the center of the latch to secure the window in the openposition. To close, pullthe center of the latch forwardand then close thelatch. Horn You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols on your steering wheel. 2-37 Tilt Steering Wheel (Option) Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your: ~Atilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering 0 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator wheel before drive. You can alsoraise it to the you 0 Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. 0 Cruise Control (Option) To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. 2-38 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two I To change the headlamps downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you from high to low beam, or to signal a turn or a lane change. lo’wto high, simply pull the To signal a turn, move the lever all theway up or down. turn signal lever all the way When theturn is finished, the lever will return automatically. toward you. Then release it. An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it. When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t cluster will also be on. flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see yourturn signal. If a bulb isburned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check forburned-out bulbs and check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicatorwill flash even if a turn signal bulb isburned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lampsregularly to make sure they are working. 2-39 Windshield Wipers For a single wiper cycle: Press the switch marked MIST and release. For more cycles, press and hold . ~~ ~ ~~ c the switch. For pulse delay wiper cycles: The pulse delay cycle system allowsyou to set the wiper speed as slowas 20 seconds between cycles, or faster. Pulse delay cycles are very useful in light rain or snow,Slide the upper control to theDELAY area. The lower the position, the slower the cycl'e; the higher the position, the faster the cycle. For steady wiper cycles: Slide the upper control either to the LO or HI position, depending on the wiper speed you want. To turn the wipers off: Slide the upper control to the OFF position. Remember that damaged wiper bladesmay prevent you from seeing well enough to drivesafely. To avoid The windshield wiper and washer controls are located to damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them.If they're frozen. tothe the right of the instrumentcluster. windshield, carefully loosenor thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, getnew blades or blade inserts. Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers.A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or iceto prevent an overload. 2-40 Windshield Washer Rear Window Wiper and Washer To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield washer switch. The washers and wipers will operate. When you release the switch, the washers will stop, and the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles,unless your wipers had already been on. Inthat case, the wipers will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier. In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A bad To use your rear wiper, slide the lower control to the mud splash can block your vision. You could hit another rear window wiper symbol. vehicle or go off the road. Check your washer fluid level often. For a delayed wiper cycle, slide the lower control to DELAY. To wash the rear window, slide the lower controlto the rear window washer symbol and hold it. The washer and wiper will operate only as long as the control is held in that position. Then the wiper will return to DELAY. 2-41 Cruise Control (Option) Cruise control can be dangerous where you can't drive safely at a steady speed. So, don't use your 'cruise control on winding roads or inheavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on I slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire tractioncan cause needless wheel spinning, and you could losecontrol. Don't use cruise control on slippery roads. I Setting Cruise Control With cruise control, yo.. :an maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This can reallyhelp on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about If ywu leave your cruise control switch on when 25 mph (40 km/h). you're not using cruise, youmight hit a button and go into cruise when you don't want to. You could When you apply your brakes, the cruise control be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise shuts off. control switch OFF until you want to use it. 2-42 1. Move the cruise control switchto ON. Resuming a Set Speed 2. Get up to the speed you want. OFF OM RESUME I-m-- ?--/-I OFF ON RESUW Suppose you set your cruise control ata desired speed and then you apply the brake. This,of course, shuts off 3. Push in theSET button at the endof the lever and the cruise control. Butyou don't need to reset it. Once release it. you're going about'25mph (40 lun/h) or more, you can 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. move the cruise control switch fromON to RESUME/ACCEL (WA) for about half a second. fou'll go right backup to your chosen speedand stay there. Use the SET button to reset cruise (see “Setting Cruise Reducing Speed WhileUsing Cruise Control Control” earlier in this section). Push in the SET buttan at the endof the lever until you hold the switch atWA longer than half a second, If yc -. reach the lower speedyou want, thenrelease it. the vehicle will keep going faster untilyou release the To slow down in very small amounts, push the switch or apply the brake. You could be startled and button for less than half a second. Each timeyou do even lose control.So unless you want to go faster, don’t this, you’ll go I mph (1.6 kmh) slower. hold the switchat WA. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When There are two waysto go to a higher speed: you take your footoff the pedal, your vehiclewill slow Use the accelerator pe’dalto get to the higher speed. down tothe cruise control speedyou set earlier. Push the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll Using Crw - ! Control on Hills now cruise atthe higher speed. How well your crui,se controlwill work on hills depends Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. there untilyou. get up to the speed you want, and When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the then release the switch. (To increase your speed in accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going very small amounts, move the switchto R/A €or downhill, you may have to brakeor shift to a lower gear less than half a second and then release it. Each to keepyour spe’eddown, Of course, applyingthe brake time you do this, your vehicle will go’about 1 mph takes you out of cruise control. Many driversfind this to (1‘6 kmh) faster.) be toomuch trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills. The accelerate feature willwork whether or not you have set an initialcruise control speed. 2-44 Ending Cruise Control Lamps There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR Move the cruise switch to OFF. Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise controlor the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased. / PC:Push this switch to turn on: ParkingLamps SidemarkerLamps 0 Taillamps Instrument Panel Lights Pull the switch to turn off the lamps. 2-45 20; A light sensoron top of the instrument panel makes the I : Push this switch to turn on the headlamps, DRL work, so be sure it isn'tcovered. The DRL system together with: will make your low-beam headlamps come on at ParkingLamps reduced brightness in daylight when: 0 SidemarkerLamps 0 the ignition is on, 0 Taillamps 0 the headlamp switch is off, and 0 Instrument Panel Lights the parking brake is released, Pull the switch toturn off the lamps. When theDRL are 'on, only your low-beam headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker Lamps On Reminder and other lamps won'tbe on. Your instrument panel won't be lit up either. If you turn the ignitionkey to theOFF or LOCK position while leaving the lampson, you will hear a When it's dark enough outside, the exterior lampswill warning chime. come on automatically and the low beams will change to full brightness.When it's bright enough outside, the Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped) exterior lamps willgo out and thelow beams will Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) can makeit easier for change to the reduc'ed brightnessof DRL (if the others to see the frontof your vehicle during thed'ay. headlamp switch isoff). Of course, you may still turn DRL can be helpful in many different driving on the hea'dlampsany time you need to. conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake whilethe ignition is in theOFF or LOCK position. Then start the vehicle.The DRL will stay off ~gtLjyou release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular Interior Lights Override Switch headlamp system when you need it. Fog Lamps Slide the lower lights control up toturn on the fog lamps, down to turn them off. An indicator light next to the control will glow when the fog lamps are on. Your headlamps must be on foryour fog lampsto go on. Although your fog lampswill go off when your high beams are on, high beams are not recommended for I driving in fog. Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Intensity Control Slide the upper lights control all the way up to increase This switch is located to the leftof the cigarette lighter the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights, down to in the center instrument panel console.It has two decrease the brightness. Slide the control all the way positions, DOOR (on) and OFF, and overrides all down to turn them off. . interior lamps except the reading lamps. The interior lamps go on eachtime you open the doors. You can turn off these lamps so that the doors may be left open without running down thebattery by turning the interior lights override switch to OFF. 2-47 Illuminated Entry System (Option) Interior Lamps Control This option comes with theoptional Remote Keyless Slide the upper lights control(located to the left of the Entry system. instrument panel cluster), all the way up to turn on the When you open the driver’s door, by itself or in interior lamps, down to turn them off. combination with any passenger door or the liftgate, the Center Dome Lamp interior lamps will come onand then gradually dim to off 10 seconds after the lastdoor is’closed. (I€the This lamp is locatedin the center of your vehicle and driver’s door has not been opened, the interior lamps has no switch of its own. It will go on each time you will immediately dim to off.) open the doors, unless you turn the interior lights override switch in thecenter instrument panel console When you press the unlock symbol on your remote to OFF. transmitter, the lamps inside your vehicle will go on, then gradually dim to off after 40 seconds, unless a door If you have the optional rear climate control,you will or the liftgate is opened. not have a center dome lamp. When you turn on the ignition,the interior lamps will Rear Interior Lamps immediately dim to off. The dome lamp will go on each time you open the doors, unless you turn the interior lights override switch in thecenter instrument panel console toOFF. 2-48 Rear Reading Lamps Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror The rear dome lamphas two reading lamps. To reduce glare fromlights behind you, pull the lever To on either reading lamp, press the switch next to it. hun toward you (to the night position). To return the mirror Rear Compartment Lamps to the day position, push the lever away from you. There are two lamps in the liftgateto light the rear cargo area. These will come on eachtime you open the liftgate, unless the interior lights override switch is in the OFF position. 2-49 Manual Remote Control Mirrors Power Remote Control Mirrors (Option) The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you The control on thedriver’s door controlsboth outside can just see the sideof your vehicle when you are sitting rearview mirrors. Turn the controlto the leftto select in a comfortable driving position. the driver’s side rearview mirror, or to the right to select Adjust the driver’s side outsidemirror with the control the passenger’s side rearview mirror. Then use the lever on the driver’s door. control to adjust each mirror so that you can just see the To adjust your passenger’s side mirror, sit in the driver’s side of your vehiclewhen you are sittingin a seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you. comfortable driving position. Both outside mirrors canbe folded forwardor rearward. In the rearward position, theywill fold flush withthe vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in automatic car washes and when maneuvering your vehicle in narrow spaces, Both outside mirrors canbe folded forward or rearward.In Storage Compartments the rearward position, they will foldflush with the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in automatic car washes Overhead Console (Option) and when maneuvering your vehiclein narrow spaces. Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so you can see more fromthe driver’s seat. A convex mirror canmake things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cuttoo sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. 2-51 The optional front overhead console has reading lamps, Garage Door Opener Compartment two switches for the optional power sliding door, storage compartments, including one for your garage door opener and one for sunglasses, a compass and an outside temperature display. The featuresof the optional overhead console areexplained on the following pages. Reading Lamps To turn on or off either readinglamp, press the switch next to it. To adjust the aim of the lamps, pivot the lamps in their sockets. You can store your gayage do'or opener in the front compartment of your overhead console, and operate it from this position. To install your garage door opener, follow these instructions: 1. Open the compartmentby pressing the latch forward. Remove hepiece of self- sticking ve~cro~, 2. Peel the protective baclung from the Velcro and press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener. 2-52 5. Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener operates with the compartment door closedwhen 3. To make sure the button on your garage door opener you press the button. is centered above the button on the compartment door, use the intersecting lines on the Velcro inside the compartment as a guide. Center the control button of your garage door opener over the point where the lines intersect, and press the opener firmly into place. Make surethe button is facing down. 4. Once the opener is installed, use the pegs inside the compartment door to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on your garage door opener when pressed. 2-53 Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF switch. Display the temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (English)or Celsius (metric) by pressingthe US/MET switch. If the vehicle hasbeen shut off for less than four hours, the display will show the temperature reading at the time the vehiclewas turned off. If the vehicle hasbeen shut off for more than four hours, an immediate reading willbe displayed when thevehicle is started. The temperaturedisplay will be updatedonce the vehicle has reached10 mph (16 km/h). If the outside temperature is37°F (3"C) or lowerwhen Temperature and Compass Display you turn on the ignition, ICE will appear brieflyon the display. It's there to caution the driver that road The outside air temperature and thecompass' are conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions displayed at the frontof the overhead console. The should be taken. control switches are located to the leftof the display. 2-54 Compass Calibration Compass Variance The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to be Variance is the difference between magneticnorth and I manually set. However, when your Trans Sport is new, geographic north. In some areas, the difference between the compass may function erratically. If it does, CAL the two can be great enough to cause falsecompass (calibration) will appear on thedisplay. To correct the readings. If this happens, follow theseinstructions to set problem, drive in a complete 360" circle three times, the variance for your particularlocation: and the compass will functionnormally. 1. Determine your location on the zone map. Note your zone number. 2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the USMET switches. The display will go off. 3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the display. When it does, releaseboth buttons. 4. Press USMET until your zone number appears on the display. 5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zonenumber. Your variance is now set. Storage Compartment To open the rear storage compartment in theoverhead console, press the release button. Sunglasses Storage Compartment To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the overhead console, press the release button. Then pull the compartment down to the full open position. 2-55 Compact Overhead Console If you have the optional power sliding do’or,your overhead console will also have twopower sliding door switches, To operate these switches, see “Power Sliding Door” in theIndex. Glove Box Your vehicle has a glove box below the dash. To open the glove box, pinch the latchrelease. . The fuse panel is located inside the glovebox door.-!he “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. ,..Thefront overhead console includes two reading lamps and a storage compartment. To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the switch next to it. Cupholders/Ashtray/Lighter To remove the ashtray for cleaning, closethe lid, then grasp the rear edge of the ashtray with your fingertips and pull up and out, in a rocking motion. To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go. LIGHTS 1,/ 1,/ When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself. NOTICE: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element. NOTICE: Two cupholders, an ashtray and a lighter are located in the center instrument panel console. Don’t put papers and otherthings that burninto The foamcupholder liners can be removed for cleaning. your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other Should the liners ever becomedamaged, see your dealer smoking materials could set them on fire, for replacement. causing damage. To use the ashtray,lift the lid. 2-57 Side Ashtrays Locking Storage Bin To open theashtray, press the right side and turn it open. To remove the ashtray for cleaning, press the snuffer as you lift up the bottom of the ashtray. If you have the optional rear climate control, your side ashtray will have a flip-up cover. 1 To remove the ashtray for cleaning, pull up on the snuffer or the cover. At the baseof the center instrument panel consoleis a storage bin. Use the door key to lock and unlock it. To open the bin, pinch the latch release. Insi'de the bin, you will find a coinholder. To remove thebin for cleaning, open it partway, then pull out and slightly up. To clean the insideof the bin, vacuum 01:wipe with a slightly damp cloth. 2-58 Saddlebags (Option) The optionalsaddlebags provide extra storagespace. To replace the bin, set the hinge pins (one on each side They arelocated at the rear of your vehicle, attached to of the bin, at the bottom) into the hinge guides (one at the covers on thetwo rear compartments. each side of the console opening,at the base), then close the bin. If the hingepins are placed properly in the Rear Storage Compartments and guides, the bin will close easily. Cupholders Your Trans Sport has an open storagecompartment and cupholder on either side of the vehicle, just behind the second row seat@). 2-59 Convenience Net (Option) Install the convenience net at the rearof your vehicle, just inside the liftgate. Attach the upper 1800psto the posts on either side of the liftgate opening(the label on the net should be inthe upper right-hand corner), Attach the lower loopsto the hooks on the floor. The side of the convenience net closest to the frontof the vehicleis higher than the side closestto the liftgate. Once you’ve loaded items into thenet, stretch thehigher side of the net up and over the top of the load to hold it firmly in place. The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 100 lbs. (45 kg). It is not designed to holder larger, heavier loads. Storesuch loads ,on thefloor of your vehicle, as far forward as you can. When not in use, we recommendthat you take down the convenience net to extend its life and retain its elasticity, and to kelepthe rear exit clear. Store the net in the pouch behind either front seat or in oneof the The optional convenience net is designed to help keep optional saddlebags. small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over during sharp turns or quick stops and starts. 2-60 Luggage Carrier (Option) A CAUTION: B If you try to carry something ontop of your vehicle that is longeror wider than theluggage carrier -- like paneling, plywood,a mattress, and so forth -- the wind can catch it asyou drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control.What you are carrying could be violentlytorn off, and this could cause youor otherdrivers tohave a collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You may be ableto carrysomething likethis inside. If you have the optional luggage carrier, you can load But, never carry something longeror wider than things on top of your vehicle. The luggagecarrier has the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle. slats and side rails attached to the roof, as well as sliding crossrails and places to use for tying things down. These let you load some things on top of your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer thanthe luggage carrier. 2-61 NOTICE: Loading cargo that weighs more than125 lbs. (56 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle. When you carry cargoon the luggage carrierof a proper size and weight, putit sn the slats,as far forward as'you can. Thenslide the crossrail up against the rearof the load,to help keep itfrom moving. You can then tie itdown. ~~ ~~ Don't exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your Pontiac. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see"Loading Your Vehicle" in the Index. To prevent damage orloss of cargo as you're driving, check now and thento make sure the luggage carrierand cargo are still securely fastened. I I .I . ,' : 2-62 Your luggage carrier has Reposition the tiedowns by turning them release knobs set in the ends counterclockwise, then slide them along the side rail. of each crossrail. Turn the Turn the tiedowns clockwise totighten them inplace. release knobs Tiedowns may be removed and used in the adjustable counterclockwise to unlock tapped plates in the crossrails. You may also use these the crossrails. Slide the tapped plates to secure bicycle orski racks. crossrails forward or back, as needed, to accommodate Outboard bumper strips on theluggage carrier crossrails loads of varying size. help to ensure a quieter ride. If you wish to attach the luggage tiedowns or other After repositioning the crossrails, be sure to tighten the equipment, you will need to release knobs by turning them clockwise. This will lock remove the outboard the crossrails in place. bumper strips to access the Use the adjustable tiedown tapped plates on the loops in the side rails to crossbar. After the tiedowns help secure large loads. or other equipmentis removed, be sure toreinstall the bumper strips. 2-63 Sun Visors Accessory Power Outlet To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You The power outlet is located in the rear compartment on can also remove them from the center mount and swing the driver's side. To open, slide the latch down and them to the side. remove the cover. Visor Vanity Mirrors The power outlet can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc. Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install. When not in use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap. NOTICE: When using the accessory power outlet: 0 Maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 20 amps. 0 Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment when not in use.Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periodscan Flip up the cover to expose thevanity mirror. drain your battery. ~~ Air Inflator System (Option) The air inflator kt is stored in a pouch in the glove box or in the rear saddlebag if you have this option. It Your vehicle may be equipped with an air inflator. With includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure gage it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and and nozzle adapters. basketballs, and you can also use itto bring your tires up to the proper pressure. The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the ~ A CAUTION: driver’s side. To remove the cover, slide the latch down and pull it towards you. Inflating something too much can make it explode, and you or others couldbe injured. Be sure to readthe inflator instructions, and inflate , any object only to its recommended pressure. 1 2-65 If the air inflator system does not turn on, the fuse may be blown or installed incorrectly. See your dealer for s'ervice. Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about 10 minutes. To reset, press the ON switch again. Don't run your air inflatorfor longer than 30 minutes at one time.If you do, you may damage the system.After 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the air inflator. To turn off the inflator, press OFF and detach the hose, first from the inflated object, then from the outlet. Replace the protective cap. Place theinflator kit tools in the pouch, and storein the glove box. To use your air inflatorsystem, attach the nozzle adapter, if required, to the end of has the pressure gage. Thenattach that to the object you .wish to inflate. cap covering the outlet. Attach to the outlet. Press the ON work even with the ignition off. .. Sunroof (Option) To open the sunroof,pull down on the latch release handle and then push it forwardand up until the glass panel locks into place. To close the sunroof, pull the latch release handle forward and down, then push it back and up. Pressfirmly to lock the latch release handle intothe closed position. NOTICE: The optional sunroof panelis not designed to be removed. It is made to open and close but to remain attached to the vehicle. The sunroof has a glass panel that opens for ventilation. 2-67 The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System 2-68 Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at J. Side Vents a glance how your vehicle is running.You’ll know K. Glove BoxRuse Panel how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’reusing, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely L. Audio System and economically. M. Rear Fan Controls Refer to the accompanying diagram of your instrument N. Cupholders/Ashtray panel to locate the components listed below. 0. Locking Storage Bin A. Side Vents P. Lighter B. Lamp Controls Q. Interior Lights Override Switch C. Turn SignaUMultifunction Lever R. Climate Controls D. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever S. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch E. Instrument Cluster T. Ignition Switch E Gearshift Lever U. Horn G. Wipermasher Controls V. Steering Wheel Touch Controls (Option) H. Center Vents I. Storage Compartment 2-69 Instrument Panel Cluster 2-70 , Speedometer and Tamper Trip Odometer Resistant Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). [o 120 531 Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Your Pontiac has a tamper resistant odometer. If you see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know that someone has probably tried to turn it back, so the numbers may not be true. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one canbe set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then that will be done. If it c’an’t,then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when The trip odometer cantell you how far yourvehicle has the new odometer was installed. been driven since you last set it to zero.To set it to zero, push the reset button, located above the fuel gage, a little to the right, 2-71 Tachometer Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights andgages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will helpyou locate them. \ \ warning lights and gages can signalthat something is \4 wrong before it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury. Y Warning lights come on when there may ble or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. As you will see in the detailson the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you startthe engine just to let YOU know they're working.If you are familiar with .this section, you should not be alarmed whenthis happens. Gages can indicatewhen there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there's a problem with your vehicle. I NOTICE: When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on !Iwhen you are driving, or^ when one of the gages shows I Do not operate the engine with the tachornetem' in there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you the red area, or engine damage may occur. I what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual'sadvice. I Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They're a big help. 2-72 Safety Belt Reminder Light Air Bag ReadinessLight When thekey is turnedto RUN or START, a chime will There is an air bag readiness lighton the instrument come on for about eightseconds to remind people to panel, which shows the words AIR BAG. The system fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is checks the air bag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. already buckled. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag The safety belt light module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more will also come onand information on the airbag system, see“Air Bag” stay onuntil the driver’s in the Index. belt is buckled. You will see this light flash for a few seconds when you turn your ignition to RUN or START. Then the light should go out. This means AIR BAG the system is ready. If the air bag readiness light doesn’t come on when you start your vehicle, or stays on, or comes on when you are driving, yourair bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. Voltmeter Brake System Warning Light Your charging system ,gage Your Pontiac's hydraulic brake systemis divided into will show the rate of charge two parts. If one part isn't working, the other part can when the engine is running. still work and stopyou. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there couldbe a brake problem. Have your brake system inspectedright away. #+' .. *::- -The reading will change as the rate of charge changes ?I'(with engine speed, etc.), but readings between the red warning zones indicate the normal operating range. Readings in either red zone indicat'e a possible .: I. . problem with your charging system. Have yourF',; I . , !:- I Pontiac serviced immediately. -.., ' "1, ' i _.. z &p' '1 When the engine is not running but the ignition 1s dn (in the RUN position), the display measures the voltade Domestic Canadian <. . '. , output of your battery. ;:3;,;:' : ,, -'- I ~ 3;.+" i 1 ._ , This light should come on briefly when you turn the .A,>*%+:.-. '~ . )- , ,' . ignition key to RUN. If it doesn't come on '-. ,. then, .;J; *. ,i I,. ) :. : :." . ~.L8 have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there's . 7. , fi- ./ a problem. ,- 8, , ,e ... . :,, &q.. <-I,.: -'.-.' - !' If the light comes onwhile you are driving,pull off the Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer tothe floor. With the anti-lock brake It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, or if the system, this light will anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing, have c’omeon when you start the vehicle towed for service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake your engineand it will System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” stay on forthree seconds. in the Index.) That’s normal. Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there could bea problem with your with the brake system warning light on can lead regular brakes. Pull off the road and stop carefully. You to an accident. If the lightis still onor if the may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal anti-lock brake system warning lightis flashing may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped Have the vehicle towed for service. (See“Towing Your carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. Vehicle” in the Index.) ~~ When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. 2-75 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. Your regular brake system may not be working If the gage pointer moves properly if the anti-lock brake system warning into the red area, your light is flashing. Drivingwith the anti-lock engine is too hot! brak’e system warning light flashing can leadI to an accident. After you’ve pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. I If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on It means that your engine coolant has overheated,If you longer than normal after you’ve started your engin& turn have been operating your vehicle under normal driving the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on conditions, YOU should pull off the road, stop your when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and thun vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes onagai In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to while you’re driving, your Pontiac needs service. do, See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. light is on but not flashing and the regular brake sylstem warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. The anti-lock brake system warning light should corne on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will lpe ready to warn you if there is a problem. 1 Low Coolant Light Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Service Engine Soon Light) If this light comes on, your system is low on coolant and the engine LOW may overheat. COOLANT SERVICE ENGINE SOON To prevent damage to yourengine, immediate action is required. Domestic Canadian See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your Your Pontiac is equipped with a computer which vehicle serviced as soon as possible. monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems. I I I'm system is called OBDI1 (On-Board I This light should come on,as a check to showyou it is Diagnostics-Second Generation)and is intended to! working, when the ignitionis on and the engine isnot assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the liferunning, If the light doesn'tcome on, have it repaired. of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner This light will also comeon during a malfunctionin one environment. (In Canada,OBD I1 is replaced by of two ways: Enhanced Diagnostics.) TheSERVICE ENGINE SOON Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been light comes on to indicatethat there is a problemand detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and service is required. Malfunctions oftenwill be indicated may damage the emission control systemon your by the system beforeany problem apparent, which is vehicle. DealerOr qualified service center diagnosis may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This and service is required. system is also designed to assistyour service technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction. a Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and L:. ' 1~ NOTICE: ., s service may be required. I If you keep driving your vehiclewith this light If the LightIs Flashing on, after a while,your emission controls may not The followingmay prevent more serious damageto work as well, your fueleconomy may not be a$ your vehicle: good and your engine maynot run as smoothly. Reduce vehicle speed. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be Avoid hard accelerations. covered by your warranty. ' I ..) ~ ~~ ~ ~ - Avoid steep uphill gra'des. . .> If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being -. , hauled as soon as it is possible. :. ; , If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If Are you low on fuel? the Light Is On Steady” following. As your engine startsto run out of fuel, your engine may If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, not run as efficiently as designed since smallamounts of stop the vehicle, Put your vehicle inPARK (P). Turn the air are sucked into the fuel linecausing a misfire. The key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this If the light remains onsteady, see “If the Light Is On condition. Make sure to install the fuel capproperly. It Steady” following. If the light is still flashingfollow the will take a few driving trips to turn the light off. previous steps, and drivethe vehicle to your dealer or Have you recently changed brands of fuel? qualified service center for service. If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see If the LightIs On Steady “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your You may be able to correct theemission system engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may malfunction by considering the following: notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on Did you just put fuel into yourvehicle? acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sureto fully install conditions may go away once the engine,iswarmed up.) the cap. Thediagnostic system can determineif the fusel This will be detected by the system and cause the light cap has been left off or improperly installed. This will to turn on. allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few If you experience this condition, change the fuelbrand driving trips should turn the light off. you use. It will require at least one full tankof the Did you just drivethrough a deep puddle of water? proper fuel to turn the light off. If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, will usually be corrected when the electrical system have your dealer or qualified service centercheck the dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. 2-79 Oil Pressure Indicator Driving your vehicle with low oil pressure can cause extensive engine damage. Have your vehicle serviced imediately. ~~ ~~~ Don't keep driving if the oil pressure is low.If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. ~~ Your vehicle is equipped with an oilpressure indiciatztos, NOTICE: Your oil pressureindicator lets you know when you may have a problem with your engine oilpressure. Damage to your engine from neglected oil When the engine is running, readings within the white problems can be costly and is not covered by area indicate the normal operating range. Readings in or your warranty. below the red area indicate that the engine's oil level may be dangerously low, or there may be another ,. . .. , ., I . ... . problem causing low oil pressure. r.. i ' ,":< , . ' .. .I: .-..:.. .. ,- ;y . * .*.I v. : (. ,i *. : , Low Oil Level Light Power Sliding Door Warning Light If this light comes on, it With the optional power means your engine is low sliding door, the sliding on oil. door ajar light will come on if your sliding door isnot completely closed. LOW OIL You need to check the oil levelright away. Driving your If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) while the vehicle without enough oil cancause extensive engine sliding door is open or inthe process of closing, and the damage. Have your vehicle serviced immediately. power sliding door ON/OFF switch is in the ON position, the sliding door ajar light will flash and a buzzer will sound. This is a warning that the sliding door is not completely closed. 2-81 Liftgate Ajar Warning Light The liftgate ajar symbol on your instrument panelwill If you shift the transaxleout of PARK (P) and^ come on if your liftgate is accelerate before the power sliding door latches not completely closed, closed, the door may reverse to the openposition. A child or others could, fall outof the vehicle and be injured. Always make sure thepower sliding door is closedand latched before you drive away. Fuel Gage Here are fourthings that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage: 0 At the service station, the gaspump shuts off before UNLEADED the gage reads FULL (F). EL ONLY 0 It takes a little more or less fuel to fillup than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little moreor less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. 0 The gage movesa little when you turn a corner, brake or speed up. 0 The gage doesn’t go back toEMPTY (E) when you turn off the ignition. Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left, when the ignition is on. When the gage first indicates EMPTY (E), you still have a little fuelleft, but you should get more soon. 2-83 Low Fuel Warning Light This light will also come on wnen you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running, to show you it is working. If it 'doesn't come on as you start your vehicle, UNLEADE~D have it fixed right away. \ 1 FUELONLY F \\' .. When there is between 3 gallons (1 1 L) and 0.5 gal. n (1.8 L) of fuel left in the tank, thewarning light ne] to the fuel symbol will go on. .. . ,. NOTES 2-85 NOTES 'I Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you'll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your Pontiac. Be f sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle. R. DEF ~ LOW HIGH Comfort Controls This section tells you how tomake your air system work for you. Your comfort control system uses ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant. With these systems you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation in your Pontiac. Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in COOL p$ WARM this section. Your vehicle's heater and air conditioner will work best if you keep your windows closed. 3-1 Fan Lever outlets, while warmed air is directed through the heater Slide the lever to the right to increase fan speed. to^ ducts at your feet. At times, this temperature difference decrease fan speed, slide this lever to theleft. may be more apparent than others. :.:%?+ LOWER; This s,ettingbrings in most of the air through ) ,'.,". - Temperature Control Lever the floor ducts and some though the defroster vents. Slide this lever to the right for warmer, heated air. $or MIX: This mode is particularly useful duringcold or cooled air, slide this lever to the left. .I inclement weather, becauseof your Pontiac Trans Sport's . 1, larger windshield area.Press this button to direct air to the ' . 1; Mode Buttons windshield and through the floor ducts. OFF: Press this button to turn the system off. Press1 any DEF: Press this button to direct most of the air tothe climate control setting to turn the system on. .I' windshield and side window vents, A/C: This setting cools the air entering your and directs it through the instrument panel Air Conditioning The air conditioning compressor operates On very hot days, your vehicle willcool down more conditioner positions. quickly and economically if you openthe windows long RECIRC: Press this button to limit the enough to let hot, insideair escape. For all settings, adjust air entering your vehicle by the temperature control lever andfan speed as desired. inside your vehicle. You may use this sc .._ng to lim,'1 t Press the RECIRC button to get maximum coolingor quick odors entering your vehicle. . .' cool-down on very hot days.It should notbe used for long UPPER: This setting directs periods of time because the air may become too coldand dry* instrument panel outlets. Adjust the temperature When thetemperature outside is above freezing,the air with the temperature control lever, air conditioner compressor will automatically condition BI-LEV: The BI-LEV setting directs outside the air when you press RECIRC (the A/C indicator your vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is light will glow), MIX or REF (the A/C indicator light your upper body through the front will not glow). 3-2 9 Press A/C (the A/C indicator light will glow) to condition The BI-LEV setting is designed for use on sunny days the air when you pressUPPER, BI-LEV or LOWER. when the air is only moderately warm or cool. On days To turn off the air conditioner compressor in these settings, like these, the sun may adequately warm your upper press A/C again (the indicator light will gooff). body, but your lower body may not be warm enough. For the best results, slide thetemperature control lever Each time you turn on the ignition, the air conditioner to the middle position, and then adjust it for comfort. will default to the setting you had selected before last turning off the ignition. If you have the optional enginecoolant heater and use it during cold weather, 0”F (- 18 O C) or lower, your When the air conditioner compressor is on, you may heating system will provide heat more quickly because sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine the engine coolant is already warmed. See “Engine performance and power. This is normal. The system is I Coolant Heater” in the Index. designed to help fuel economy while it maintains the desired cooling level. Ventilation System The airconditioner removes moisture from the air, so Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies you may sometimes notice water dripping from under outside air into the vehicle when it ismoving. Outside your vehicle when it is idling or after it has been turned air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air off. This is normal. conditioning fan is running. Heating Your vehicle has air outlets that allowyou to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Push Slide the temperature lever to the right to warm the air. the outlet up or down to direct airflow to your preference. In the LOWER mode, outside airwill be brought in and Increase or reduce the amount of airflow by opening and sent through the floor outlets. The heater works best if closing the louvers. Opening and closingthe louvers will you keep your windows closed while using it. also direct airflow fromside to side. Please keep the areaaround the base of the center instrument panel console and thearea between and under the front seats freeof objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear. The control for the rear fan is located below the audio system. SelectLOWER, BI-LEV or MIX to direct airflow to the rear air outlet and to the rear side windows. Use the temperature controllever to adjust the temperature setting. Select the forceof air you want, from LO to HI, by sliding the rear fan control to the desired setting. 10 maintain a comfortable temperaturein the rear area without making the front passengers uncomfortable, adjust the front fan speed first, then adjust the temperature setting. If your vehicle is equipped with seats in the To turn off the rear fan, slide thecontrol. to OFF. you will havea rear air outlet anda rear maximize airflow to therear of your the left bucket seat in the secondrow in the forwar9 position (s'ee "Adjusting Rear Seats" in the Index), ?his uncovers the rear air outlet. Ventilation Tips Rear Climate Control (Option) Keep the hood and front air inlet freeof ice, snow or If you have this option, you will have a master control any other obstruction (such as leaves). This will for therear fan on the center instrument panel console, allow the heaterand defroster to workmuch better, and a rear control next to the second row seat, on the reducing the chance of fogging the inside of driver’s side of the vehicle. your windows. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the rear, use When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the either rear fan control to adjustthe force of air coming blower fan to HIGH for a few moments before through the rear outlets. See “Rear Fan -- Master driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow Control’’ and “Rear Fan -- Rear Control” later in and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the this section. inside of your windows. Select the desired climate control mode using the Keep the area around the base of the center directional controls onthe instrument panel (see “Mode instrument panel console and the air path under the Buttons” earlier in the section). The mode you choose front seats clear of objects. This helps air tocirculate will regulate both the front and rear climate control throughout your vehicle. systems. The temperature of heated or cooled air directed to the rear of the vehicle cannotbe adjusted with the temperature control lever. Select RECIRC, UPPER, BI-LEV or LOWER when outside temperatures are warm ormoderate. 3-5 In the RECIRCmode, or if you press A/C when the system is inthe UPPER or BI-LEV modes, cooled air will be directed to the rear of the vehicle through the overhead and third-row air conditioning outlets. If you select A/C in the LOWERmode, cooled air will be directed through the rear floor vent (see “Rear Air ~ Vents” later in this section) unless the temperature, ,,,... , ,. control lever is set approximately 30 percent from ,_.. the full cold setting. Heated air will result with the 8. x temperature control lever setting above 30 percent from the full cold setting. Temperature adjustment of the heated air is not possible. Cooled air will again return .- . when the temperature control lever setting is returned to approximately 25 percent from the fullcold setting 1 If you do not select A/C in the UPPER or BI-LEV 1 Rear Air Vents: To maximize airflow through the rear modes, air directed to the rear of the vehicle will be/ heater outlet, place the left bucket seat inthe second row cabin temperature. .’$ :. ,1 in the forward position (see “Adjusting Rear Seats” in Select LOWER, MIX or DEF when outside temper ures the Index). are cool. In these modes, heated air will be directed o the The vent forward of the rear heater outlet is the cold air rear of the vehicle through the rear side window veni, s I return vent. Be sure to keep it free of obstructions. and the rear floor heater vent. ‘. ’ I Please keep the area around the baseof the center instrument panel console andbetween and under the ‘I front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to ,. the rear. ~ , I’ .’ ., . 3-6 I’ LOW MED REAR FAN OFF REAR LO MED HI REAR FAN Rear Fan -- Master Control: The master control for the rear fan is located below the audio system. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the rear area, Rear Fan -- Rear Control: This feature allows select the force of air you want, from LO to HI, by passengers riding in the rear seats to control the flow of sliding the control tothe desired setting. air to the rear area of the vehicle. To transfer control of the rear fan to the rear control The rear control is located on the armrest next to the switch, slide the master control to REAR. The rear second row seat, left position. The rear fan master control switch will not operate when the master control control on the instrument panel must be in the REAR is in any other position. position for the rear control to operate. Select the force of air you want, fromLOW to HI, by To turn off the rear fan, slide the control to OFF. turning the control to the desired setting. To turn the-rear fan off, turn the control to OFF. The rear fan can also be turned off at the master control. - 3-7 Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger To rapidly defrost the windshield, slide the temperature Ress R. DEF (Rear Defog)to warm the defogger grid on control lever all the way to WARM and press DEE the rear window. The indicator light willglow while the ,::*' .. '1;. ' rear window defogger is operating. The rear window Adjust the fan tothe highest speed. defogger will turn off automatically after about 10 minutes To keep the windshield clear and bring in heated_. air of use. If you turn it ow again, the defogger will operate through the heater ducts, press MIX. . ., 1' . !: for about five minutes only,You can also turn the defogger off by turning off the ignition or pressing the switch again. When the temperature outside is abovefreezing, the air conditioner compressor will run in these settings to help Do not attach a temporary vehicle license acrossthe rernlove moisture from the air. defogger grid on the rear window. ": .I' Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger vents located on the top of the instrument panel. For NOTICE: additional side window defogging, press the BI-LEV I button and adjust the fan tothe highest speed. Aim1 the side vents on the instrument panel toward the side Don't use a razor blade or something elsesharp windows. For, increased airflow to the side vents, close on the inside of the rear window, If you do, yon I ,. the center vents. '- could cut or damage the warming grid, and the . 8. 1..1 , , (1 i ' repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty. :..> .: , , . ., . iL. .. . 93:.. 1 . .- /#, . .> .., 1 -,.-;1 .'. , .., , 3-8 Audio Systems AM-FM Stereo Your Delco@ audiosystem has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do and how to operate all its controls,to be sureyou’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. Setting the Clock For AM-FM Stereo and AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold SEEK down arrow until the correct hour appears. Press and hold SEEK up arrow until the correct minute appears. Playing the Radio VOL: Turn this hobto turn the system on or off. Setting the Clock for AM-FM Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume.Turn it Stereos with Equalizers counterclockwise to decrease volume. Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold SEEK RECALL: Press the upper knob briefly to recall the left arrow until the correct hourappears. Press and hold station being played or to display the clock. SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears. AM-FM: Press the lower knob to getAM or FM. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radiostations. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station. 3-9 PUSHBUTTONS: The four nunmered pushbuttons KL Setting the Tone you return to your favorite stations.YOU can set up ~ to BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increaseor 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). decrease bass. The middleposition is a detent. 1. Press AM-FM to select the band. TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or 2. Find the station you want. decrease treble. The middle position is a detent. If a station is weak or noisy, slide the lever down to reduce 3. Press and hold one of the four numbered buttoqs until SET appears on the display. Whenever yog the noise. press that numbered button, the station you set Ad,justing the Sneakers will return. BAL: Turn me controlbehind the upper knob to move 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle In addition to the four stations set as above, up to position is a detent and balances the speakers. three additional stations may be preset on each FARE: Turn the co'ntrol behind the lower knob to move pressing two adjoining buttons at the same the sound to the front or rear speakers, The middle 1. Tune in the desired station. position is a detent and balances the speakers. 2. Press SET. 3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at time (within five seconds). 4. Whenever you press the same buttons, you set will return. r.ty ;I: AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player Finding a Station (Option) AM-FM: Press the lower knob to select AM or FM. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower radio station. PUSHBUTTONS: The fournumbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). 1. Find the station you want by using TUNE. 2. Press SET. (The SET indicatorwill appear briefly on the display.) 3. Press one of the four pushbuttons, witlxn five seconds. Playing the Radio Whenever you press that numbered button,the station VOL: Turn the upper knob to turn the radio on and off you set will return. and control the volume. Turn the knob clockwise to 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. increase the volume and counterclockwise to decrease In addition to the four stations set as above, up to the volume. three additional stations may be preset on each band by PROG-RCL: Press the upper knob to recall the station pressing two adjoining buttons at the sametime. Just: being played or to display the clock, to switch between 1. Tune in the desired station. the clock and radio when the radio is on, and to go from one side of the tape tothe other when a tape is playing. 2. Press SET. (The SET indicator will appear on the display.) 3-11 3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the samq Playing a CassetteTape time (within five seconds). ?...w.: ~7,'L, .- '-;; . .'.' ' , .,. .j .,. Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 4. Whenever you press the same buttons, the station 30 to 45 minutes long on each side, Tapes longer than . P. .I you set will return. 1,. - '. .I(: that are so thin they may not work wellin this player. AUTO DNR: The DNR@ (Dynamic Noise Reductipn) While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL, automatically reduces background hiss onAM and DM TREBLE and BASS controls just asyou do for the radio broadcasts and cassettetapes, radio. The #displaywill show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing. When the right indicator Setting the Setting Tone 'I .I arrow is lit, selections listed on the bottom sideof BASS: Slide this lever up to increase bass and down to the cassette are playing. When the left arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the cassette decrease it. ::,,<> . .I,' are playing. TREBLE: Slide this lever up to increase treble and down to decrease it. If a station is weak or noisy, slide FWD: Press the right arrow to rapidly advance the ~- tape. It will continue forwarding until you press the lever down to reduce the noise. JG-... : . . '- .-"... .. I-- I, STOP-EJECT lightly. Adjusting the Speakers :!p. .. ,,:I: ; .& REV: Press the left arrowto rapidly reverse the tape.It will BAL: This control behind the upper knob adjusts the continuereversing until you press STOP-EJECT lightly. ,. - .' : 1, sound between the right and left speakers. :$g$j, ;, ' PROG-RCL: Press this knob while a cassette tapeis FADE: This control behind the lower knob adjusts the play,ing to hear the other side of the tape. sound between your front and rear speakers...... STOP-EJECT: Press this button to removethe tape or p-,:." ' ' .*+l stop playing the tape and switch to the radio. .I . , ' - I_. :&::\;,c . . ... -:, .&- :.:,.. ' , , '?'.r,:, ! I .:. ,. ,,A 1 ,_ a. a. , ~ -. .~ . .. . ~. 3-12 - I ..-. ,:-- .- , . __ .> 4 .- - ,,' , ' . ,. - ,:.,:.:. ~ I.- .... ._.>.._, . 8:. .,, .:, - .-. .. - 8: ; .- . .. AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Finding a Station and Equalizer (Option) BAND: Press this button to get AM, FMl or FM2. The display shows your selection. Your radio has AMAX. With an AMAX-certified receiver, your radio can produce quality AM sound comparable to FM stereo. AMAX reduces noise without reducing the high frequencies you need for the best sound. In addition to improved sound quality, AMAX includes more stations on the AM band. You don't have to do anything to your Delco@/GMradio because AMAX is automatic. TUNE: Turn the lower knob slightly to the left or right to chooseradio stations. If you hold the knob to the left or right, it will tune rapidly. You can also turn it one stop Playing the Radio at a time to fine-tune a specific frequency. PWR: Press this button to turn the system on or off. SEEK: Press the right arrow to go to the next higher VOL: Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume and station. Press the left arrow to go to the next lower counterclockwise to decrease volume. radio station. MUTE: Press the upper knob to mute the radio or cassette tape player. Press the button again to resume the sound. RCb- Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock. PUSHBUTTONS: The five numbered pushbuttons let Playing a Cassette Tape you return to your favorite stations.You can set up^ to, Press PWR to turn the radio on. The radiowill play until 15 stations (five AM, five FM1 and five FM2).,,,, ;c-i , , . , :,'.I; a cassette is pushed into the cassette entrydoor (the tape I. Find the station you want by using TUNE 0r'SEEK. side goes in first).Your tape player is built t'o workbest with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. 2. Press and hold one of the fivenumbered buttons until SET appears on the display. Whenever you Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player, press that numbered b'utton, the station you set. . , will return. I' ' While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE and BAL 8. , .... controls just asyou do for the radio.The display will 3. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. ., ? . ,. ; ' ..>y.: , . show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing. Setting the Tone -: , 1~ When the right indicator arrow is lit, selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing. Whenthe left EQUALIZER: A five band equalizer is part of yopr arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the audio system. Slidethe levers up to boost or down o cassette are playing, seduce frequency range. It's best to begin with the 1levers in the middle position, then adjust each lever as yob like. PREV: Press this button to search for the previous selection on thetape. The tape willback up and stop at Adjusting '* -peakers the first four-second quiet spot in the tape. PressPREV again or PROG to stop searching fOr previous selections. BAL: This control behind the upper knob adjusts t e sound between the right and left speakers. .">.- .p NEXT: Press this button to search for the next selection on the tape. The tape will stop atthe first four-second FADE: This control behind the lower kn'ob adjusts~the quiet spot in the tape. Press NEXT again or PROGto sound between your front and rear speakers. , stop searching for the next selection. .. I PROG: Press this button to play the other side of the AM-FM Stereo with CompactDisc Player tape. When the end of the tape is reached, the other side and Equalizer (Option) will play. CrO2: This button lets you set the system for the type of cassette being used. Press this button when playing high-bias chrome or metal tapes. If you are using standard tapes, make sure CrQ2 is turned off. REV: Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. Theradio will play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. FWD: Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected station while the tape advances. Playing the Radio ST-PL: Press this button to change the tape function when the radio is on. Press this button again to return to PWR: Press this button to turn the system on oroff. the tape function. VOL: Turn this knob clockwise toincrease volume and EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio counterclockwise to decrease volume. will play. MUTE: Press the upper knob to mute the radio or This system has automatic Dolby@Noise Reduction to cassette tapeplayer. Press the button again to resume reduce background noise on tapes encoded with Dolby the sound. NR. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a RCL: Press this button briefly to recall the station being license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. played or to display the clgck, . . 1 '-. ! .: Dolby and the double-D symbol aretrademarks of , . .. Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 3-15 I, Finding a Station I.':,. ..' 1: . - 2. Press and hold one of the fivenumbered buttons until SET appears on the display. Whenever you BAND: Press this button to get AM, FMl or FM2. , ' (FMI allows you to preset five stations, FM2 allows you press that numbered button, the station you set to preset another fivestations.) The display shows dour will return. selection and will indicate whether or not the radio 3. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. station is in stereo. Setting the Tone Your radio has AMAX. With an AMAX-certified receiver, your radio caiproduce quality AM sound comparablh to EQUALIZER: A five band equalizer is part of your FM stereo. AMAX reduces noise without reducingthe audio system. Slide the levers upto boost ordown to high frequencies you need for the best sound. In addition reduce frequency range. It's best to begin with the levers to improved sound quality,AMAX includes more stations in the middle position, then adjust each lever asyou like, on the AM band. You don't have to do anything to your DelcolGM radio because AMAX is automatic. Adjusting theSpeakers TUNE: Turn the lower knob slightly to the left or gkt BAL: This control behind the upper knob adjuststhe to choose radio stations. If you hold theknob to the left sound between the right and left speakers. or right, it will tune rapidly. You can also turn it on1 stop FARE: This controlbehind the lower knob adjusts the at a time to fine-tune a specific frequency. sound between your front and rear speakers. -" j SEEK: Press the right arrow to go to the next high. r Playing a Compact Disc station. Press the left arrow to go to tkae next lower" . '. radio station. 1:: ":1: 1.; The integral CD player can play 8 cm "single" mini-discs. Full-size compact discs andmini-discs are PUSHBUTTONS: The fivenumbered pushbutton$ let ~ loaded in the same manner. you return to your favorite stations. YOU can set'up 10 15 stations (five AM, five FM1 and five FM2). 1 Press PWR to turn the radio on. Insert a disc partway into the slot, l'abel side up. The player will pull it in. 1. Find the station you want by using TUNE or If ERR appears on the display and the disc comes back REV: Press and hold this button to quickly reverse out, it could be that: within a track (song). Release it toplay the passage. You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc FWD: Press and hold this button to quickly advance should play when the road gets smoother.) within a track (song). Release it to play the passage. The disc is upside down. COMP: Press this button to make loud and soft . ; . passages more nearly equal in volume. Press it again'b' " It is dirty, scratched or wet. resume normal play. It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and ST-PL: Press this button to change to the disc function try again.) when the radio is on. Press this button again to play the While a compact disc is playing, CD will appear on disc. The disc will begin playing at the point where it the display. had been stopped. RCL: Press this button to see what track is playing. EJCT Press this button to removethe disc or stop the Press itagain within five seconds to see how long it has disc and switch to the radio. been playing (elapsed time). The track number also appears when the disc is inserted,you change the Theft-Deterrent Feature volume or when a new track starts playing. Delco-Loc II@is a security feature for the compact disc PREV: Press this button to go to the start of the currenr: player. It may be used or ignored.If ignored, the system track. If you press it more than once, the player will plays normally and the radio is not protected by the continue moving back through the disc. feature. If Delco-Loc I1 is activated, yourradio will not operate if stolen. NEXT: Press this button to go to the start of the next track. If you press it more than once, the player will If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason, you continue moving forward through the disc. must enter your secret code againbefore the system will turn on. RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in a random order. 3-17 I Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature d,,; I ., ,; ;$ 8. Press the SEEK right or left arrow to make the .~.. . The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your fourth digit of your code appear. secret codeto activate the Delco-Loc I1 system. It is 9. Turn the TUNE knob to make the last two digitsof recommended that you read though all of the steps your codeappear. before starting the procedure. ..I; ' : 10. Press BAND and REP will appear on thedisplay for NOTE; If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse five seconds, and then 000 will appear on between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to the display, time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4. 11. For verification, repeat Steps 6 through 11. If SEC 1. Write down any six-digit number and keep it ina appears on the display, your audio system is secured. t .!>!, : I , s,afeplace separate from the vehicle. ,i = : If --- shows on the display,your system is not secured. You must restart the entire procedure again 2. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or RUN,'/ : position. from Step 4. 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them &own Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the After a Power Loss secret code number which you have written down. Enter your secret codeas follows; pauseno more than 4. Press SET and 000 will appear on the display. ,I . 15 seconds between steps: 5, Press the SEEK right or left to make the first 1. Turn the ignition on. (The radio should be off. digit of your code appear. .+; . ;.f] LOC will appear on the display.) ,,.i. !w:+.;, - 6. Turn the TUNEknob to make the second and third 2. Press SET and 0'00 will appear on the display. digits of your code appear. 3. Press the SEEK right or left arrow to make the first 7. Press BAND and 000 will appear on the 'display digit of your code appear. again. Now you are ready to enter the last three 4. Turn the TUNE knobto make the secondand third digits of your code. digits of your codeappear. " I 5. PressBAND and 000 will appear on the display 5. Press the SEEK right or left arrow to make the first again.Now you are ready to enter the last three digits digit of your code appear. of your code. 6. Turn the TUNE knob to make the second and third 6. Press the SEEK right or left arrow to make the fourth digits of your code appear. digit of your code appear. 7. Press BAND and 000 will appear on the display 7. Turn the TUNE knob to make the last two digits of again. Now you are ready to enter the last three your code appear. digits of your code. 8. Press BAND. If the time appears, the unlocking 8. Enter the last three digits of your code. The display sequence was successful. If the display shows SEC, will show the numbers as entered. the digits did not match and the unit is still secured. 9. Press BAND after you have confirmed that the code 9. Press BAND after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret codeyou have written down. The matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is no display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now longer secured. operable and secure. If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer. display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered. Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature When battery power is disconnected from asecured 1. Turn the ignition on. radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on 2. Turn the radio off. the display. 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down TO unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the until SEC shows on the display. Theft-Deterrent FeatureAfter a Power Loss” earlier in this section. 4. Press SET and 000 will appear on the display. 3-19 Steering Wheel Controls (Option) SEEM: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station. If a cassette tape or compactdisc is playing, the player will advance with the up arrow and rewind with the down arrow. PRESET Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons, AM-FM: Press this button to choose AM, FMl or FM2. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, it will stop and the radio will play. Understanding Radio Reception I' '. ; .,.I If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain FM Stereo radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel. FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals VOLUME: Press the' up arrow to increase the volume will reach only about 10 to 40 miles ( 16 to 65 km), Tall and the down arrow to decrease volume. buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go. PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radiois playing. AM MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it The range formost AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range,however, can cause stations to interfere witheach other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it, Tips AboutYour Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almostundetectable NOTICE: until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud Before you add any sound equipmentto your and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can add sound level before your hearing adapts to it. what you want. If you can, it’s veryimportant to To help avoid hearing loss or damage: do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. engine, Delcoradio or othersystems, and even Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may and clearly. interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure tocheck Federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. 3-21 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player -__ .;., - You may also choosea, non-scrubbing action, wet-type .,?. .,>”-1’ ’+ * ”’. ,.. i cleaner which uses a cassettewith a fabric beltto clean A tape player thatis not cleaned regularly cancauqe the tape head, This typeof cleaning cassette willnot reduced sound quality, mined cassettes or damageda eject. Itmay not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing mechanism. Cassette tapes shouldbe stored in their type cleaner. cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight 1 and extmne heat. If they aren’t, theymay not operate , Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound qualitymay properly or may cause failureof the tapeplayer. degrade overtime. Always make sure that the cassette tape is in good condition beforeyou have your tape Your tape player should be cleaned regularly afterevery player serviced. $0 hours of use, If you notice a reductionin sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or Care of Your Compact Discs the tape player is at fault.If this other cassette hasno improvement in sound quality, clean the tape playqr. Handle discscarefully. Store them in their original cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlight Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action, and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a non-abrasive cleaning cassettewith pads which scIli b clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and the tape headas the hubsof the cleaner cassettetu clean it,wiping from the center to the edge. is normal for the cassetteto eject while cleaning. the cassette at least three timesto ensure thorough Be sure never totouch the signal surfacewhen handling cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassetteis discs. Pickup discs by grasping the outer edgesor the available through your Pontiacdealer. edge of the hole and the outeredge, Integrated Roof Antenna NOTICE: Don't mount anything to your roofor headliner, such as an antenna or a luggage carrier. If you puncture theroof or headliner, youcould damage or destroy your integrated roof antenna. Have any work of this type done by your dealer. ~IIi. > . ,, ' ..- . . ., , : . , If you want to add a mobile phone or two-way radioto your vehicle, there are specialprecautions you'll need to take because of your integratedroof antenna. See "Adding Sound Equipment" in theIndex. Your state-of-the-art integrated roof antenna is not visible. It is located between the roof and headliner of your vehicle, covering the entire roof area fromthe rear edge of the front doors to the liftgate. NOTES Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can giveabout driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your Pontiac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) Defensive drivingreally means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are aboutthe most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common.Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never Here you’ll find information aboutdriving on different know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve or turnsuddenly. also included many other useful tips on driving. I ., $77?i’.I The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem Drunken Driving ., .:I; :. ,, is for people never to drink alcoholand then drive. But Death and injury associated with drinking and driving what if people do? How much is “too much” if the is a nationaI tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to driver plans to drive?It’s a lot less than many might the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victi 1 s think. Although it d’ependson each person and situation, every year. 4” here is some general information on the problem. ., Alcohol affects four thingsthat anyone needs to ~; The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone drive a vehicle: -j.e 1I _. who is drinking depends upon four things: Judgment The amount of alcohol consumed Muscular Coordination The drinker’s body weight 0 Vision The amount of 5ood that is consumed before and Attentiveness. during drinking Police records show that almost half of all motor :..” a The length of time it has taken the drinker to vehicle-related deaths involve alco’kol.In most cas s, consume thealcohol. these deaths are the result of someone who was dri king According to the American-Medical Association,a and driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual jotor180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce vehicle-related deaths have been associated with t e use (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.f BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the dult same BAC by drinhng three 4-ounce (I20 ml) glasses population -- choose neverto drink alcohol, so the$ of wine or three mixed drinks if each had1- 1/2 ounces never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it s (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There aregood medical, psychological and developmelatal reasons forthese laws. .. man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAClimit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BACwill be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol isin the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. But the ability to drive isaffected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worseat night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if Statistics show that the chance of being in acollision the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a consumes food just before or during drinking will have a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of somewhat lower BAC level. this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lowerrelative percentage of body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a 4-3 The body takes about anhour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t de right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to I take sudden action, as when a child darts into the str eet? Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous. A person with even a moderate BAC might not be ble Your reflexes, perceptiom, attentiveness and t,o react quickly enough to avoid the collision. :;‘.. ,,I--a judgment can be affected by even a small amount t.J . There’s something else aboutdrinking and driving of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even many people don’t know. Medical research shows fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking. alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries Please don’t drink and driveor ride with a worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord r driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a heart. This means that when anyone whohas been 01 cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver drinking -- driver or passenger -3 is in a crash, thaq who will not drink. person’s chance of being killed or is higher than if the person had Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involves perception time and you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and reaction time. the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. at the places where the tires meet the road. That’s perception time.Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with onedriver and as long as two orthree seconds or morewith another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; and the condition of your brakes. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road canprovide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-5 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in Anti-Lock Brakes spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between advanced electronic braking system thatwill help hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you prevent a braking skid. do a lot of heavy bralung. If you keep pace with the When you start your engine, or when you begin to dnve traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whle hs . _”,; , . - better braking and longer brakelife. .;;::,: test is going om, and you may even notice that your brake ~ *\$’ 1 , I ~, . , pedal moves a little. (You may also hear a clicking noise If your engine ever stops while you’redriving, brake normally but don’t pump yourbrakes. If you do, the if you leave the ignition in the RUN position for about four seconds before starting the vehicle.) This is normal. pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginei’l;. .-- stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But If there’s a problem with the you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is anti-lock brake system, this used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal warning light will stay on or will be harder to push. j flash, See “Anti-Lock ~ Brake System Warning j Light” in the Index. ‘fieanti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and road conditions. Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumpsout in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. A computer sensesthat wheels are slowing down. If one As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on of the wheels is about to stoprolling, the computer will wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the rear wheels. 4-7 Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change thetime you need Steering to get your footup to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance,If you get too closeto the vehicle in Power Steering front of you, you won’t havetime t’oapply yourbrdkes If you lose power steering assist because the engine if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leaqe stops orthe system is not functioning,you can steer but enough room up ahead to stop, even thoughyou have it will take much more effort. anti-lock brakes. Steering Tips Using Anti-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal Driving on Curves down and let anti-lockwork for you. You may feel the It’s important to take curvesat a reasonable speed. system working, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Braking in Emergencies Experienced driver or beginner, eachof us is subject to Use your anti-lock braking system.when you need to. the same lawsof physics when driving on curves.The With anti-lock, you can steer and brakeat the same traction sf the tires againstthe road surface makes it time. Inmany emergencies, steeringcan help you more possible for the vehicleto change its path whenyou turn than even thevery best braking. the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep d.?qj. , the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understandthis. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the mgle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factoryou can control.. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you Steering in Emergencies suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet There are times when steering can be more effective the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too than brakmg. For example, you come overa hill and much of those places. You can lose control. find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in to go, and slow down. time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are the problem. based on good weather and road conditions. Under less Your Pontiac can perform very well in emergencies like favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a Emergencies” earlier inthis section.) It is better to curve, doit before you enter the curve, while your front remove as much speed as you can from a possible wheels are straight ahead. collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available, Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. 4-9 Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto theshoulder while you’re driving. An emergency like this requires close attention and^ a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without remqving either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have If the level of the shoulder,is only slightly below the avoided the object, pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer The fact that such emergency situations are always so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. possible is a good reason to practicle defensive driving at You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn all times and wear safety belts properly. until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then ,_ ~’ turn your steering wheelto go straight down the roadway. I 1, 4-10 Passing Do not get too closeto the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a thing, following too closely reduces your area of two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, vision, especially if you’re following a larger accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver? vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane reasonable distance. highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, passing vehicle occupies the same lane asoncoming start to accelerate but stay inthe right lane and don’t traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in get too close. Time your move so you will be judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can increasing speed as the time comes to move into the suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. “running start” that more than makes up for the So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and you need only slow down and drop back again and to crossroads for situations that might affect your wait for another opportunity. passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. 0 If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someoneisn’t trying to Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea Remember to glance over your shoulder and check turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken the blind spot. center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road aheadis clear). Never crossa solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. Check your mirrors, gl'aslce over your shoulder Loss of Control start your left lane change signal before Let's review what driving expertssay about what of the .right laneto pass I When you are ahead of the passed vehicle tosee its frontin your happens when the three control systems (brakes,steerkg inside mirror, activate your right lane changesi 'nal and acceleration) don't have enough friction wherethe and move back into the right lane. (Remember that tires meet the road todo what the driver has asked. your right outside mirroris convex, The In any emergency, don't give up. Keep trying to just passedmay seem to be farther away steer and cons'tantly seek an escape route or areaof than it reallyis.) less danger. Try not to pass more than one vehicle ata time on two-lane roads, Reconsider before passingt 'e Skidding next vehicle. 9 In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable Don't overtake it sldwly moving vehicle too rap'dly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,iti may care suited to existing conditions, andby not be slowing down or starting to turn. "overdriving'' those conditions.But skids are always possible. If you're being passed,make it easy for following driver to get aheadof you. The three typesof skids correspond to your Pontiac's three control systems.In the braking skid,your wheels canease a littleto the sight. I. aren't rolling. In the steering os cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose Icornering force. And in the acceleration skid,too much throttle causes th'e driving wheelsto spin. A cornering slud and an acceleration skid are best Driving at Night handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts toslide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on asurface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a reason is that some driversare likely to be impaired -- by “mirrored surface” -- and slow down when you have alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, by or fatigue. any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. 4-13 Here are some tips on night driving. have lesstrouble adjusting to night. But if you’re a Drive defensively. driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare fromheadlamps, but they also make a lot 0 Don’t drink and drive. of things invisible. 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce thb You can be temporarily blinded by approaching I glare from headlamps behind you. ~ headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjustto the dark. 0 Since you can’t see as well, you may need to ~ slow down and keep more spaclebetween you abd When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver other vehicles. who doesn’t lower thehigh beams, or a vehicle with I misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring 0 Slow down, especiallyon higher speed roads. your directly into the approaching headlamps. headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. Keep your windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. clean -- inside and out. Glare at nightis made much 0 If you’re tired, pull off the roadin a safe place worse by dirt on the glass.Even the insideof the glass and rest. can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flashmore than clean glasswould, Night Vision making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. $ut as Remember that your headlamps lightup far lessof a we get older these dif€erences increase. A 50-year--old roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly same thing at night as a 21)-year-old. lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes What you do in the daytime can also affect your ni ht be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright,! blindness the inability to see indim light -- sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will -- and aren’t even awareof it. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerateor turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. 4-15 Wet brakes can causeaccidents. They won’twork well in aquick stlopand may cause pullingto one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving througha large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride onthe water. NOTICE: This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re I going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. If you drive too quickly through deep puddlesor standing water, water can come in through your Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your engine’s air intake and badly damage your tires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one or engine. Never drive through water thatis slightly more islow. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the can’t avoid deep puddlesor standing water, drive water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. through them very slowly. Hydroplaning usually happens athigher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The Some Other Rainy WeatherTips best advice isto slow down when it is raining. Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just your parking lamps -- to help make you more visible to others. 0 Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires’’ in the Index.) 4-17 City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: e Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would €or a cross-country trip. e Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving,”) e Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Freeway Driving At the entrance, thereis usually a ramp thatleads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch onyour turn signal,check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. \ Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expectto move Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night. expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same the next exit. speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left laneon a freeway as a passing lane. 4-19 I The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. Here are somethings you can check before a trip: The exitspeed is usually posted. .'.?._); ..;..I., ., .:.> 0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? .. Reduce your speed accordingto your speedometer, not Are all windows clean inside and outside? to yo'ur sense of motion. After driving forany distance 0 Wiper Blades: Are theyin I good shape? at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going 0 FheZ, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked slower than you actually are. all levels? Before Leaving on a Long Trip :,I- 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? Make sure you'reready. Try to be well rested.If you Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, must start when you're not fresh-- such as after a day's trouble-free trip.Is the tre'ad good enough for work -- don't plan tomake too many miles that first part long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you recommended pressure? can easily drive in. Weather Forecasts: What's the weather outlook Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it along your route? Should you delayyour trip a short serviced and maintained, it's readyto go. If it needs time to avoid a major storm system? service, have it done before startingoit. Of course! you'll find experiencedand able service experts'in 0 Maps: Bo you have up-to-date maps? Poaatiac dealers all acrossNorth America, They'll L ready and willingto help if you need it. Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it justplain falling asleep at the wheel? Callit highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash andbe injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: 0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. a Keep your eyes moving. Scan the roadahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your Driving on steep hills or mountainsis different from instruments frequently. driving in flat orrolling terrain. a If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on thehighway as an emergency. 4-21 If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you're planning to visit there, here are sometips that can your trips safer and more enjoyable. Keep your vehicle in good shap'e. Check all flui Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system ignition off is dangerous.Your brakes will have to and transaxle. These parts can work hard on.:;'; :: i. .. , . ._,<.. do all the work of slowing down. They could get so mountain roads. +;,,'::: h*,~ 1-,-. hot that they wouldn't workwell. You would then Know how to go down hills. The most importa t have poor braking or even none going down a hill. ' thing to know is this: let your engine do some the You could crash. Always have yourengine running s'lowing down. Shift toa lower gear when you 4 and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. down a steep or long hill. Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better. If you don't shift down, your brakes could getso Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane hot that they wouldn't work well. You would then roads in hills or mountains. Don't swing wideor cut have poor braking or even none going down a hill. across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let You could crash. Shiftdown to let your engine you stay in your own lane. assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope. As you go over the topof a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, likea stalled car or an accident. 0 You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks areaor winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in yourvehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. Here are some tips for winter driving: Have your Pontiac in good shape for winter. You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. 4-23 Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution. Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels willspin and polish the surface under the tires even more. Your anti-lock brakes improve yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice,” Very cold clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. snow or ice can be slickand hard to drive on. But wet Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpassmay ice can be even more troublebecause it may offer the remain icy when the surrounding roads areclear, If least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake beforeyou freezing (32”F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins to fall. are on it. Try not to brake while you’reactually on Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers. can get there. I If You’re Caught in a Blizzard Turn on your hazard flashers. Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help and you can hikethrough the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keepyourself and your passengers safe: You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. 4-25 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. Whenyou run the engine, make itgo a little faster than justidle, That is, push the accelerator slightly.This uses less fuel for the heat thatyou get and it keeps the Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehi d,le. battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) lgas restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on to get inside,CQ could overcome youand kill with your headlamps. Let the heater runfor awhile. you. You can't see it or smell it, so you might dot Then, shutthe engine off and close the window almost know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow all theway to preserve the heat. Start the engine again around thebase of your vehicle, especially an and repeat this onlywhen you feel really uncomfortable that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check^ from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible. Preserve the around again from time to time to be sure snob fuel as long as you can. To klp keep warm, you can get doesn't collect there. , out of tbe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. Open a window just a little on the side of the i vehicle that's away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. I Loading Your Vehicle Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads onyour front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORPXX/XX equally on both sides of the centerline. 1’1 1’1 GVWR ’ GAWR FRT GAWR RR LBlKG Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the THIS VEHICLE CONFORMSTO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDSIN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. or rear axle. SERIAL NUMBER M.P.V. MODEL: SPEED Electronic Level Control (Option) MPBY TIRE SIZE RTG RIM PSI/KPA (COLD FRT On vehicles equipped with the optional electronic level RR SPA control, the rear of the vehicle isautomatically kept SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR AD’DITIONALINFORMATION level as you load or unload your vehicle. However, you should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR. You may hear the compressor operating when you load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system ,The CertificationEirelabel is found on the rear edge of self-adjusts. This is normal. the driver’s door. The compressor should operate forbrief periods of time. The labelshows the size of your original tires and the If the sound continues for an extended period of time, inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight your vehicle needs service. To keep your battery from capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR being drained, you may want to pull the ELC fuse in the (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the fuse control panel until you you can have your vehicle weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. serviced (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the Index). The CertificatidTire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross 4-27 Using heavier suspension components to get adde If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, durability might not change your weight ratings. tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as €ast your dealer to help you load your vehicle the as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they' 11 keep going. I A CAUTION: = DO not load yourvehicle any heavier than the - GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear. Things you put inside your vehicle can strike GAWR. If you do, parts on yourvehicle can .. .'$ and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or break, or it can change way the your vehicle in a crash. handles. Thesecould cause you to lose control. Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Also, overloading can shorten thelik of ti: ,.-,, Try to spread theweight evenly. your vehicle. . f'. . Never s'tack heavier things, like suitcases, :*-.r , , ' , ,:,. ..a,:. , inside thevehicle so that some of them are above thetops of the seats. Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. When you carry so'mething inside the vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can. Your warranty does ot cover parts or components.c . that fail because of overloading. ._ 8.. Don% leavea seat folded down unless you r need to. 4-28 .1, Towing a Trailer Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer’’ A CAUTION: that appears laterin this section. But trailering is I - - different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct properly, you can lose control when you pulla equipment, and it has to be used properly. trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, th’e brakes may not workwell or even at all. You That’s the reason for this section. In it aremany -- time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. and your passengers could be seriously injured. Many of these are important for your safety and that of Pull a trailer onlyif you have followed all the your passengers. So please read this section carefully steps in this section.Ask your Pontiac dealer for before you pull a trailer. advice and information about towinga trailer with your vehicle. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.What’s more, the 1 NOTICE: trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing ~ the pulling requirements. Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not coveredby your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow the advice in this part, andsee your Pontiac dealer for important information about towinga trailer with your vehicle. If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer You should use THIRD (D) (or, as you need to, a lower .... ,/ . . ,- gear) when towing a trailer. your vehicle in If YOU do, hereare some important points: Operating .:.. .I THIRD (D) when towing a trailer will minimize heat There are many different laws, including speed imit buildup and extend the life of your tsmsde. restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make ure Three important considerations have todo with weight: your rig will be legal, not only where you live 1 ut also where you'll be driving,A good source fa this the weight of the trailer, information can be state or provincial police. the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle's tires. 0 Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) orless. You should always Weight of the Trailer use a sway control if your trailer will weigh mdre How heavy can a tr'ailer safely be? than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch ddaler about sway controls. .i ,;> It should never weigh more than 1,400 lbs. (630 kg) ~~ I '. with up to six occupants in the vehicleor more than Don't tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) with up to two 'occupants. If you (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engibe, have the o'ptional trailer towing package, your vehicle axle or other parts could be damaged. ?--?ti, ii4. , : , can tow up to 2,400 lbs. (1 090 kg) with up to six Then, during thefirst 500 miles (800 km) that you occupants or up to 3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up to two tow a trailer, don't drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and occupants. But even that can be tooheavy. don't make starts at fullthrottle. This helps yo+ It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in dt the example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside heavier loads. temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pull a I trailer are all important,. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle. You can askyour dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at : Customer Assistance Center Pontiac Division One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre B 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer weight to measure because it affects the total or gross tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12percent of cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be the total loaded trailer weight (B). riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are Your Vehicle” in the Index formore information about proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right your vehicle’s maximum loadcapacity. simply by moving some items around in the trailer. 4-31 If you’ll ble pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .. * 1. weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure touse a Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limil‘ for properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and cold tires, You’ll find these numbers on the sway control of the proper size. This equipment is Certificatiod‘ire label at the rear edge of the drive:’s very important for proper vehicle loading and good door or see “Tire Loading” in theIndex. Then be s re handling when you’re driving. you don’t go over theGVW limit for yourvehicle, ,:’+ , Will you have to make any holes in thebody of your including the weight of the trailer tongue. , .~,:, - .< vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? .,,_-I . . Hitlches ’. -1 If you do, then be sure to seal the holes laterwhen It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment...:,:i :’ ’ you remove the hitch.If you don’t seal them,deadly Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads ;area carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaustcan get few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the some rules to follow: it.:.. +* Index). Dirt and water can, too. The bumpers on your vehicle arenot intended I; Safety Chains for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other You should always attach between your vehicle bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a . , chains and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue .. . . frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to I, of the trailer so that the tongue willnot drop to the road the bumper. .I ,, I if it becomes separated from thehitch. Instructions . ’ I I .--.-> * I, about safety chains may be provided by the hitch .~. . ,8’ 8- manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the r.3 ~ ., . , -.8, 1 >3.i <- ,.i manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety ”; ! chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always { -’, , , j leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig. I And, never allow safety chains to drag on theground. I, -I l~ . ‘I .::.I.’. Trailer Brakes Driving with a Trailer If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) I loaded, then it needs its ownbrakes -- and they must be adequate. Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. If you have a rearmost window open andyou Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into pull a trailer with yourvehicle, carbon monoxide your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake (CO) could come into yourvehicle. You can’t see systems won’t work well, or at all. or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousnessor death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in theIndex.) To maximize your safety when towinga trailer: Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip. Keep the rear-most windowsclosed. If exhaust does come into yourvehicle through a window in the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh, outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use RECIRC because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle. (See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.) 4-33 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experi nee. Following Distance Before setting out for theopen road, you'll want to et Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel oi handing and braking with theadded weight of the would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This trailer. And always keep inmind that the vehicle yo are can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking driving is now a good deallonger and not nearly as and sudden turns. responsive as your vehicle is by itself, Passing Before you start, check thetrailer hitch and platforhI You'll need more passing distance up ahead when (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connect r, you're towing a trailer. And, because you're a good deal lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has longer, you'll need to go much farther beyond the electric brakes, start your vehicleand trailer rnovin1 and passed vehicle beforeyou can returnto your lane. then apply the trailer brake controll'er by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your A ' : Backing Up .., ' , electrical connection atthe same time. &,,+:.*f *, I. , Hold the bottom 'of the steering wheel with one hand. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the Then, tomove the trailer to the left,just movethat hand load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer br2,kes - I to the left, To move the trailer to the right, moveyour *. .; v: ... -,. are still working. .?a ,, I ., hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,if .' " '2,&.., 3: . : . .h possible, have someone guide you. ' *:.- " ..I A -.a . , , I 8, r;' . ; .&..' $$.$. i, ... , .-i.f+'' ~ v::g. .-, 1 . I5 . I "* - - T,.. .,- i- I@.. 1, .*i.;rr.+ L. . 1, ..-. .. , .. -, I '* 1 **A.4q Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you NOTICE: are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are Making very sharp turns while trailering could still working. cause the trailer to come in contact with the Driving Grades vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid On making very sharp turns while trailering. Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that When you’re turning witha trailer, make wider turns than they would get hot and no longer work well. normal. Do this so your trailer won’tstrike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance. speed to around 45 mph (70 kmh) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating. Turn Signals When Towing a mailer If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra 1,000 lbs. (454 kg), you may prefer to drive in wiring and a different turn signal flasher (included in the THIRD (D) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0) optional trailering package). (or, as you need to, a lower gear). This will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your transaxle. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. 4-35 I' Parking on Hills When You Are Read,y tu Leave After You really should not park your vehicle, with a trail Parking on a Hill attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal could start to move. People can be injured,and both down while you: your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. 0 Start your engine; But if you ever have topark your rig on a hill, here' s 0 Shift into a gear; and how to do it: +- :. .I, 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don't shift into Release the parking brake. PARK (P) yet. :,!:j$i\ \:;',: 2.. Let up on the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. i 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the ~ 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. ,.I, Maintenance When Trailer Tuwing 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P). Your vehicle will need servicemore often when you're pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer oDeration are automatic transaxle fluid-(don't overfill), I 1 engine oil, belts,cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will .. 8. help you find them quickly. If you're trailering, it's a good I idea to review these sections before you start your trip. ' .' + -8.'2 .' .. . . Check periodically to see ~alall hitch nuts and bolts . . 1' 1 . . .,., .' .' ,, 1' are tight. .. . -* .;, , ...... - . . ...I, .' . -...... I -8 , 4-36 NOTES 4-37 .. . . 1 7 Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you’ll find what to do about someproblems that Your hazard warning flashers letyou warn others. They can occur on the road. also let police know you have a problem. Your front and Hazard Warning Flashers rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. 5-1 Jour hazard warning flashers switchis on the steering Other Warning Devices column, below the ignition switch. Pressthe button in to turn your flashers on. If you carry reflective triangles,you can setone up at the sideof the road about300 feet (100 m) behind Your hazard warning flasherswork no, matter what your vehicle. position your key is in,and even if the key isn't in. Jump Starting If your battery hassun down, you may want to use another vehicleand some jumpercables to start your Pontiac. But please use the following steps listedto do it safely. On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding door, a low voltage batteryor replacing a battery may cause the system to become inoperative. See "Power Sliding Door" in the Index for more information. , ... ' TOturn off the flashers, pull out on the collar. i'i7 I menthe hazard warning flashersare on, your turn won't work.signals won't -, .. ..I , 5-2 I NOTICE: Batteries can hurtyou. They canbe If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system witha dangerous because: negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. e They contain acid that can burnyou. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables 0 They contain gas that can explode orignite. can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching They contain enoughelectricity to burn you. each other. If they are, it could cause a ground If you don’tfollow these stepsexactly, some or all connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to of these things can hurtyou. start your Pontiac, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. I NOTICE: NOTICE: You could beinjured if the vehicles roll. Setthe Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage parking brake firmly on eachvehicle. Put an to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby automatic transaxlein PARK (P) or a manual your warranty. transmission in NEUTRAL(N). nying to start your Pontiac by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and itcould damage yourvehicle. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlet. Turn off all lamps 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid battery with a negative ground system. sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio! 5-3 I",.. NOTICE: ,:gi..;.. 2;; -1 , :. If you Ieave your radio on, it could be badly %I: . - - damaged. The repairs wouldn'tbe covered by-1 . :e*, .I,..-. ~ '. your warranty. - .._.:.I' ... , 4. Open the hoods and locatethe batter% An electric fancan start up even when the en,==xe Your Pontiac has a remote positive (+) jump starting is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, terminal. The terminal is in the red box on the same side clothing and tools away from any underhood of the engine compartment as your battery. electric fan. You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery. 5. Find the positive (+>and negative (-) terminals on To open the remotepositive (+) terminal box, pull the each battery. .~.. '. '.I-8 I i tab and open the cover. - ,- >I. , , .. .,I. - i, .I 5-4 6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or 1 CAUTIOh, missing insulation.If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too. Using a‘ match near a battery can cause battery Before you connect the cables, here are some basic gas to explode. Peoplehave been hurt doing this, things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to you need more light. negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage Be sure the battery hasenough water. You don’t the battery and maybe other parts, too. need to add water to the Delco Freedom@battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount CAUTION: of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas Fans or other moving engine parts can lqure yuu could be present. badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. once the engines are running. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with 7. Connect the redpositive (+) cable to the positive (+) water and getmedical help immediately. , terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 5-5 Don't let the other nd Don't let the other end touch anything until the next touch metal. Connt :t step. The other end 'of the negative (-) cable doesn 't go it to the positive (+ to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal terminal of the goo part on the engine of the vehiclewith the dead battery. battery. Use a remc e positive (+) termin 10. Attach the cable at least the vehicle has one 18 inches (45 em) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical ...J. connection is just as good there, but the Now connect the Is chance of sparks negative (-) cable to getting back to the the good battery's I battery is much less. negative (-) terminal. 11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 12. Try to start thevehicle with the dead battery. If it won't start after a few tries, it probably needs service. 5 c. 5-6 13. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent Towing Your Vehicle electrical shorting.Take care thatthey don't touch each other or any other metal. Try to have a Pontiac dealer ora professional towing service tow your TransSport. They can provide theright equipment and knowhow to tow your vehicle without Idamage. See "RoadsideAssistance" in the Index. If your vehicle hasbeen changed ormodified since it was factory-new by adding aftermarket items likefog lamps, aeroshrting, or special tires andwheels, these instructions may not be correct. Before you do anything, turnon the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towingservice: That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front 1- c +/ with sling-type equipment. 0 That your vehicle has front-wheel drive. The make, model and year of your vehicle. A. Heavy Metal Engine Part e Whether you can still move the shift lever. B. Good Battery 0 If there was an accident, what was damaged. C. Dead Battery 5-7 When the towing service arrives, let the tow opera! know that this manual contains detailed towing 2:. instructions and illustrations. The operator may wk .,I -.: . , ,l ., see them. -. 7' P ,A* To help avoid injury to you or others: Never let passengers ride ina vehicle that is being towed. Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. 0 Never tow with damaged partsnot fully secured. Never get under yo'ur vehicle afterit has been lifted by the tow truck. Always use separate safety chainson each side when towing a vehicle. 0 Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead. When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key in the OFF position. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle's steering column lock for this. The transaxle should be in NEUTRAL (N) and theparking brake released. Front Towing A vehicle can fallfrom a car carrier if it isn’t adequately secured. This can cause a collision, serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The vehicle should be tightlysecured with chains or steel cables beforeit is transported. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,. canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use T-hooks inserted in theT-hook slots. Never use J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and suspension components. 5-9 I NOTICE: ..:. .- 1.' I Do not tow with sling-type equipment or fascia damage will occur.Use wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be requided for car-carrier equipment. ;,;;:,,. , I ; -,'I.:' :. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could '/ - . I cramage a vehicle. Damage canoccur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. ~ To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly ~ and raise thevehicle until adequate clearance is obtained 'between the ground and/or 2:~,:,.~ ,: j. ... l , ?, ::,,*,-:...; ' >:*-.:.:-. ,, wheel-lift equipment, !&p; ,. '-.; f &*$s::?"', . - Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to i suspension components when usingcar-carries Attach T-book chains on both sides, in the slottedholes ~ equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the in the bottom of the frame rails behind the front wheels. I T-hook slots. -:I:.1. .* , 1 These slots are to be used when loading and securing to ~ ~~ ' I .. :, car-carrier equipment. 8. -,,: I - !. . .,.. , ., ...' .-I..' .,., .. , . , : Rear Towing Tow Limits -- 55 mph (90 kh),500 miles (800 km) Attach T-hook chains on both sides, in the slotted holes in the frame rails, just aheadof the rear wheels. These slots are to be used when using sling type equipment or when loading and securingto car-carrier equipment. Attach a separatesafety chain around the outboard end on each lower controlarm. 5- 11 Position the lower sling crossbar directly under the Attach a separate safety chain around the end of each rear bumper. axle inboard of the spring. 5-12 Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your Pontiac’s instrument panel. See “Coolant TemperatiAre Gage” in the Index. You also have a low coolait level Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou light on your instrument panel. See “Low Coolant badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away Light” in the Index. from the engineif you see or hear steam coming If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before opening the hood. If you keep driving when your engineis overheated, the liquids init can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engineif it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. NOTICE: If your engine catchesfire because you keep driving with no coolant, yourvehicle can be badly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered by your warranty. 5-13 I i' If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engiqe If you no longerhave the overheatwarning, you can drive. Justto be safe, drive slower for about10 minutes, If you get the overheat warningbut see or hear no 1 If the warning doesn't come back on, you can stearn, the problem may not be too serious.S'ometi +s drive norm'ally. the engine can get a little too hot when you: If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park your 0 Climb a long hill on a hot day. vehicle rightaway. 0 Stop after high-speed driving. If there's still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine Idle for long periods in traffic. for two or three minutes while you'reparked, to see {,:':1.,.'. if the warning stops. But then, if you still havethe Tow a trailer. . .-.::,,, 5 j \::: ,: .: warning, turn uff the engiae and get everyone out of If you get the overheatwarning with no sign of steam, the vehicle until it cools down. ,&%.j ,' try this for a minute or so: , .-7:,; I. _I You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service 1. Turn off your airconditioner. help rightaway. 2. Turn on your heater to full hotat the highestfan speed and open thewindow as necessary. 3. If you're in a traffic jam, shift toNEUTRAL(1N); -.'.- . otherwise, shift to the highest gear while ?::':',[ ; driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (ajI.', I or THI~(B). When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see: An electric fan under the hood can start even up when the engine isnot running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing andtools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Radiator Pressure Cap C. Electric Engine Fan D. Electric Engine Fan 5-15 r heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engine if thereis a leak, If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant, That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned, Get any leak fixed before you drivethe vehicle. The coolant level should be at or above the FULL HOT mark. If it .isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. Engine ‘damage fromrunning your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine fan(s)are running. If the engine is overheating, both fan(s) should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service. How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant plain water or the wrong mix,your engine could level isn’t at or above the FULL HOT mark, add a get too hot but you wouldn’t getthe overheat 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou o’r DEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean at thecoolant recovery tank. (See “EngineCoolant” in water and DEX-COOL antifreeze. the Index for more information.) NOTICE: ~ ~ Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other In cold weather,water can freeze and crack the liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper engine, radiator, heatercore and otherparts. coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning Use the recommended coolant and the proper system is set for the proper coolant mix. With coolant mix. CAUTION: (Continued) 5-17 I c You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine. When the coolantin the coolant recovery tankis at or above the FULL HOT mark, startyour vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator but be sure the coolingsystem is COO^ before you do it. 5-18 Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling system can blow out andburn you badly. They are under pressure, andif you turn the radiator pressure cap, -- even a little -- they can come out at high speed. Neverturn thecap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressurecap. 5-19 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator I 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, butnow push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5-20 3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to the base 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL of the filler neck. HOT mark. 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 5-21 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feelthe 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins toflow out of the engine fans. filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the 7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mix through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 5-22 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving, If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. If air goes by driving slowly to a level place.Turn on your hazard out of a tire,it’s much more likely to leak outslowly. warning flashers. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are fewa tips about whatto expect andwhat to do: If a front tire fails, the flat willtire create adrag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheelfirmly. Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle Steer to maintain lane position, and thengently brake to can slip off the jack androll over you or other a stop well outof the traffic lane. people. You and they could bebadly injured. A rear blowout, particularlyon a curve, actsmuch like a Find a level place to change your tire. To help skd and may require the same correctionyou’d use in a prevent the vehicle from moving: skid. In any rear blowout, removeyour foot from the 1. Set the parking brake firmly. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by 2. Put the shiftlever in PARK (P). steering the way you want the vehicleto go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently 3. nrnoff the engine. brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front andrear of the If a tire goes flat, the next part showshow to use your jacking equipment to changea flat tire safely. tire farthestaway from theone being changed. That would be the tireon the otherside of the Air Inflator (Option) vehicle, at the opposite end. Your vehicle may have an air inflatorused to bring tires up to the proper pressure. See“Air Inflator System” in the Index for more details. 5-23 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you’ll need is the in storage compartment at the rear,of the vehicle, on the passenger’s side. The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire. Open the jack storage compartmentby sliding the latch down and removing the compartmentcover. b" 1 Remove the jack and jackingtools by loosening the The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, wing nut and retainer bar. behind the rear bumper. Insert the narrow end of the shaft into the hole above the rear bumper. Then attach Separate the plastic pouch from the jack andremove the the folding wrench to the shaft. jacking tools (folding wrench and shaft) from the pouch. Rotate the folding wrench counterclockwise tolower the compact sparetire until it can be pulled from under the vehicle. 5-25 The tools you'll be using include the jack (A), folding wrench (€3) and shaft (C). Slide the cable retainer through the center of the spare, then place the compact spare tire near the flat tire. Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, each wheel nut is covered with a nylon cap. Use the folding wrench to remove the nylon caps fromthe wheel nuts before , you loosen the nuts. If your vehicle has theplastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, you cannot separate thenylon wheel nut caps from the cover. Loosen them completely using the folding wrench, and remove the wheel cover. If the wheel nut caps have been completely loosened, the wheel cover will come off easily. 2. Loosen the wheel nuts -- but do not remove them -- using the folding wrench. 3. Near each wheel, there is a notch in the vehicle’s frame. Position thejack and raise thejack head until it fits firmly into the notch inthe vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire. Do not raise the vehicleyet. Put the compact spare tire nearyou. 5-27 NOTICE: 7 - Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow could be badly injured or killed. Never get under the vehicle to fall off the jack. Be sure to fit the a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. jack lift head into the properlocation before raising your vehicle. 4. Attach the folding wrench to the jack, and rotate the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head a few inches. 7. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. Rust or dirton thewheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts 5. Raise the vehicle by rotating the folding wrench become looseafter a time. The wheel could come clockwise inthe jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off and cause an accident. When you change a off the ground so there is enough room for the spare wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom the places tire to fit. where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an 6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rustor dirt off. 5-29 1 Never use oil or grease on studs #ornuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose, Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. ;. >?<;:!,~ I8 ,a . ..:..I; . -' - '7 I 8. Replace the wheel nutswith the rounded endof the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheelis held against thehub. -. 9. Lower the vehicleby attaching the folding wheel wrench to the jack and rotating the wrench counterclockwise. Lower thejack completely. 5-30 10. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-cross NOTICE: sequence, as shown. Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire.It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle until youhave the flat tire repaired or replaced. Incorrect wheel nuts orimproperly tightened NOTICE: wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead toan accident. Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If Be sure to use the correctwheel nuts. If you have you try to puta wheel cov’er onyour compact to replace them, be sure toget new GM original spare, you could damage the cover or the spare. equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 Lb-ft (140 N*m). 5-31 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and tools^^^^. 1, :: Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these inplace. the proper : Lay the flat tirenear the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down. Slide the cableretainer through the center of the wheel and raise the flat tireuntil you hear the hoist mechanism click twice, This means the wheel is firmly stored against the underside of the vehicle. Replace all jacking tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and replace the compartment cover. k'.. . 5-32 Unless you have the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, be sure to also store the nylon nut caps. When you replace NOTICE: the compact sparewith a full-size tire, replace the bolt-on wheel covers orthe nylon nut caps. Tighten When the compact spareis installed, don’t take them “hand tight” over the wheel nuts, using the your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash folding wrench. with guide rails. The compact spare can get When storing the spare tire, be certain to turn the spare caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and so the valve stem is nearthe rear of the vehicle. This wheel, and maybe other partsof your vehicle. will help you to check and maintain tire pressure in the spare. Don’t use your compact spareon other vehicles. Push against the tire to be certainit is stored firmly. And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with Compact Spare Tire other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when tire and its wheel together, your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). I NOTICE: After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare them can damage your vehicle and can damage tire is correctly inflated.The compact spareis made to the chains too. Don’t use tire chainson your perform well at posted speedlimits for distances up to compact spare. 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare witha full-size tire assoon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you needit again. 5-33 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, I Ice or Snow NOTICE: What you don’t want to do when your vehicleis stuck is Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your to spin your wheels too fast.The method known as vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but too fast while shifting your transaxleback and you must use caution. forth, you can destroy your transaxle. 1 r For information aboutusing tire chainson your vehicle, see “Tire Chains”in the Index. If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan Rocking your vehicle to get it out: explode, and you or others could be injured. First, turnyour steering wheelleft and right, That will And, the transaxleor other partsof the vehicle clear the area aroundyour front wheels. Then shift back can overheat. That could cause an engine and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, compartment fireor other damage. When you’re spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the stuck, spin thewheels as little as possible. Don’t accelerator pedal whileyou shift, ‘andpress lightly on spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 kmlh) as shown the accelerator pedal when the transaxle isgear. in If on the speedometer. that doesn’t getyou out after a few tries,you may need w to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. NO'TES NOTES Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you willfind information about the care of your Doing Your Own Service Work Pontiac. This section begins with service and fuel If you want to do someof your own service work, you’ll information, and thenit shows how to check important fluid want to get the proper Pontiac Service Manual. It tells and lubricant levels. Thereis also technical information you much more about howto service your Pontiac than about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearancecare. this manual can. To order the proper servicemanual, see Service “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. Your Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle best and wants Your ‘vehiclehas an airbag system- Beforeattempting you to be happy with it, We hope you’ll go to your to do your own servicework, see “Servicing Your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM Air Bag-EquiPPed Pontiac” in *e Index. parts and GM-trained and supported service people. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. the mileage and the date of any service work you Genuine GM parts have on; of these marks: perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index. 6-1 specification could provide improveddriveability and emission control system protection compared to other gasolines. You can be injured and your vehicle could be Be sure theposted octane is at least 87. If the octane is .’ less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noisewhen damaged if you try to do servicework on a s-.’! ‘I _I : you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine. vehicle without knowing enough ab’out it.-;-:i . ... -I ” ‘ .. If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,’ ’ I ~ t :. still hear heavy knoclung, your engine needs service. experience, and the proper replacement ; .’ . I., But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noisewhen parts and tools before you attempt any ,,: you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, i:, . y -+..< vehicle maintenance task. . ‘5 ,;: .,;i . . and you don’t have tobuy a higher octane fuelto get rid 1- /* ’ 0 Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and.‘:ir of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knockthat means other fasteners.“English” and “metric” you have a problem. fasteners canbe easily confused. If you use If your vehi’cleis certified to meet California Emission the wrong fasteners, parts can later break Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), :,it : I -; it is designed to operate on fuels thatmeet California or fall off.You could be hurt. ~ ?+: z.> . ‘1. specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle Fuel will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or specifications, but emission control system performance higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications may be affected. The malfunction indicator lampon ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 your instrument panelmay turn on and/or your vehicle in Canada. Improved gasoline splecifications have been may fail a smog-check test.If this occurs,return to your developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the Association (AAMA) forbetter vehicle performance cause of failure. In the eventit is determined that the and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA cause of the conditionis the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing Fuels in Foreign Countries additive called MMT. If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate If you plan on driving in another country outside the and the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument United States or Canada,the proper fuel may be hard to panel may turn on. If this happens, return to your find. Never use leaded gasolineor any other fuel not authorized Pontiac dealer for service. recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuelwouldn't be covered by To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States your warranty. are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming inyour engine and fuel To check on fuelavailability, ask an auto club, or system, allowing your emissioncontrol system to contact a major oil company that does business in the function properly. Therefore, you should not have country where you'll be driving. to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines You can also write us at the following address for containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, advice. Just tell us where you're going andgive your and reformulated gasolines may be available in your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). area to help clean the air. General Motors recommends General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation, that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier. North American Export Sales (NAES) 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 NOTICE: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don'tuse it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn't be covered underyour warranty. I Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don't smoke if you're near gasolineor refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flamesand smoking materials awayfrom gasoline. The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver's side of your vehicle. You will noticethat on the inside of the hinged door there is a place to hold the gas cap while ' . -?->. .. you are adding fuel, AG., ' I .,.a.: ;, '7,7 ~ . , .>>hi , , . i' -7 , - .., i. : . .+, ., -. .Mi. :. ' . :, ,, 1 -. , :. .y. '~....-, -. ; _. ...,. If you get gasoline on yourselfand then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Gasoline can spray outon you if you open the fuel filler captoo quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler capslowly and wait for any “hiss”noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all theway. Be carefulnot to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from While refueling, hang the cap inside the fuel door. painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left Outside of Your Pontiac” in the Index. (counterclockwise). When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until you hear at least three clicks. Make sure youfully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. 6-5 8. Hood Release .: ,&. . I; <, ~ 1 88 NOTICE: [; ,*:: ;r,;<- If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right~ type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper ventingz and yourfuel tank andemissions system m ight b'e damaged. b'emight ,, . ' 1~ Checking Things Under the Hood1- An electric fan under thehood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not runnhg. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. -I-. I i;I: Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liqui'ds like gasoline, oil, c001mt,brake flui'd, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. To open the hood, first pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine temperatures under the hood, so be carefulwhen handling it. Use your hood prop sleevewhen handling Next, go to the front of the vehicle and pull 11n on the the hood prop. underhood release. Lift the hood. 6-7 A. Coolant Recovery Tank E Brake Master Cylinder B, Power Steering Fluid Reservoir G. Air Cleaner C. Engine Oil Fill H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir D. Engine Oil Dipstick I. Battery E. Transaxle Fluid Dipstick 6-8 Pull forward on the hood prop to release it from its It’s a good idea to check your engine oilevery time you storage clip. Put theend of the hood prop into the slot in get fuel. In orderto get an accurate reading,the oil must the underside of the hood. be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Let the hood down and close it firmly. Underhood Lamp Your underhood lamp willgo on when you open the hood. Engine Oil 1 If the LOW OIL, light on the 1 instrument panel comes on, 1 it means you need to check ~ your engine oil level right away. For more information, The engine oil dipstickis located at the front of the engine LOW 1 see “LOW OIL Light” in the compartment, near the center. The dipstick handle has a ‘ Index. You should check bright, yellow loop design for easier identification. OIL 1 your engine oil level 1 regularly; this is an Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to added reminder. drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick 1 might not show the actual level. 6-9 Checking Engine Oil When to’Add Oil Pull out the dipstickand clean it with a paper towelor If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, to add some oil. But you must use the right kind. This keeping the tipdown, and check the level. part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. NOTICE: Don’t add too much oil.If your engine has so much oil that the oil level getsabove the cross-hatched area thatshows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. What Kind of Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by loolung for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol. If you change your own oil, be sureyou use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. The engine oil fill cap is located just behind the engine oil dipstick. Just fill itenough to putthe level somewherein the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engineis American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the followingchart: 6-11 1 .- - 1 As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your RECOMMENDED SAE WlSCOSltr GRJDIE ENGINE OILS vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1QW-30if it's going FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. These numbers onan oil SA€ llSCOStTY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RIINGE. container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils, such asSAE 2OW-50. COOK HOT FOR MIS WEATHER SYMBOL NOTICE: Use only engine loil with the American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines ''Starburst" symbol, Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. Engine Oil Additives SAE SW-30 PREFERRED Don't add anythingto your oil.Your Pontiac dealeris ready to adviseif you think something should be added. COLD WEATHER ,L*., ! L DO ;NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OA ANY O GRADE OB NOT RECOMMENDED When to Change Engine Oil What to Do with Used Oil See if any one of these is true for you: Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin This is particularly important when outside for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and temperatures are below freezing. water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See driving in stop-and-go traffic). the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal Most trips are through dusty areas. of oil products.) You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you your vehicle. change your own oil, be sure to drainall free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi by putting it in thetrash, pouring it on the ground, into or other commercial application. sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead, Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If break down sooner. If any one of these is truefor your you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever center for help. occurs first. If none of them is true, change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower. (See “Change Oil Indicator” in the Index.) 6-13 Air Cleaner I! ~~ ~~ Operr ng the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleansthe air, it stops flame if the engine backfires.If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off. NOTICE: The air cleaner is located at the front of the engine If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a compartment (on the driver’s side of the vehicle), to the damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get left of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. into your engine, which willdamage it. Always Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to have the air cleaner in place when you’redriving. replace the air filter and the crankcaseventilation filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. Checking or Replacing the AirCleaner Automatic Transaxle Fluid When to Check and Change 1 A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90”F (32”C) or higher. 0 In hilly or mountainous terrain. 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. Uses such as found intaxi, police or delivery service. 1. Loosen the four wing nuts. If you do not use yourvehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. 2. Pull the top of the air cleanertoward the front of the vehicle and remove the air cleaner filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. 3. Be sure to installthe air cleaner filter, replace the cover and tighten the wing nuts securely. 6-15 1~b~to Check To get the right reading,the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, whichis 180"F to 200°F Because this operation can bea little difTicult, you may (82°C to 93°C). choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealership r' ,'..76. . ,;g . ,' : Get the vehiclewarmed up by driving about 15 miles Servic'eDepartment. -.+e. :I:., (24 km)when outside temperaturesare above 50°F If you do it yourself,be sure to follow all the instrdctions ( 10 O C). If it's colder than50 OF( 10O C); you may have here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. to drive longer. .. Checking t1 lid Level NOTICE: &:.' ,I'I e Park your vehicle on a level place. Keepthe engine running. Too much or too littlefluid can damageyour transaxle. Too much can mean thatsome of the e With the parking brake applied, placethe shift lever fluid could come out andfall on hot engineparts in PARK (P). or exhaust system parts, startinga fire'. Be sure to * With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift getan accurate reading if youcheck your , lever through each gear range, pausingfor about ,-?., 7 transaxle fluid. three seconds in each range, Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P), Wait at least30 minutes before checkingthe transaxle 0 Letthe engine ,at idle th~eta five minutes. ,., . . . I fluid levelif you have been driving: '. , .. 0 When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C). 'h: , . 0 At high speed for quite a while. 'I . ' ', , i. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. . ,I . ~. ' 8. .. While pulling a trailer. -.:. , , -.. c .. , j:-._r .It Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level mustbe in the cross-hatched area. 1. The dipstick is located towardthe back of the engine compartment, near the center. The dipstickhas a 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the bright redloop design for easier identification. dipstick backin all the way. Pull outthe dipstick and wipeit with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push it back in all theway, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again. t 6-17 ,,, How to Add Fluid **.p,,**.: ,:' : ',' Engine Coolant at..+-:' it. ,;< '. . Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what The cooling system inyour vehicle is filled with new kind of transaxle fluid touse. See "Recommended DEX-COOL 7M (orange-colored, silicate-free) engine ;:*:.,j- . Fluids and Lubricants" in the Index. $-,?'?5- ' . coo'lant. This coolantis designed to remain in your If the fluid levelis low, add only enough of the proper vehicle for 5 years or 100,000 miles (166000 km), fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on whichever occurs first. . ., , the dipstick.- .bi./ ,h. The following explains your cooling systemand how to 1. Pull out the dipstick. :<,;q:,. ; add co'olant when it is low. If you have a problem with 3.1 'f, ' , j; engine overheating, see"Engine Overheating" in 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid the at the Index. dipstick hole to bringit to the proper level. It doesn't take much fluid, generally less than a pint (0.5 L). A 50/50 mixture of water andthe proper coolant for Don't overfill. We recommend you use only fluid your Pontiac will: labeled DEXRON@-111,because fluid withthat label a Give freezing protection downto -34°F (-37°C). is made especially foryour automatic transaxle. a O Damage causedby fluid other Give boiling protectionup to 265 OF( 129 C). not covered by your new vehicle 0 Protect against rust andcorrosion. 0 After adding fluid, recheck the '0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. described under"How to Check." 0 Let the warning lights and gages work as 0 When the correct fluid levelis obtained, push the they should. ._. . F~:. dipstickbackall in the way. .. ,.i ,- , . ... ~k.. /, : , I . _.- ;", 7. . 6 '.'... ,, . . .< .8 , ' I;. ;'. I .. . I .I. .. c-2: <.I - .-.' , ' - - .: ,, . . . ._ ~ . .L '::,. ' I ..PI : . :-... , , . .I. .. , : . .:, .a_ . I .- ,. .. , ,. -' I ..%:.J'>. : ' , I.,. GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer) (GM Part NOTICE: No. 3634621) with any complete coolant change. If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else. When adding coolant it is important thatyou use DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) coolant meetingGM Specification 6277M. I If silicated coolant isadded to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator Adding only plain waterto your cooling system corrosion may result. In addition, theengine can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other coolant will require changesooner -- at liquid like alcohol,can boil beforethe proper 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning whichever occurs first. system is set for the propercoolant mix. With plain wateror the wrong mix,your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat What to Use warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL (orange-colored, water andDEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze that meets GM Specification silicate-free) antifreeze. 6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. Use 6-19 -~ Checking Coolant I NOTICE: I If you use an improper coolantmix, your engine could overheat andbe badly damaged, The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your ’ 1 warranty. Too much water in the mix can fre&ze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core aqd other parts. other I If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system. I I NOTICE: The engine coolantreservoir is located towards the If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to middle of the engine compartment,on the passenger’s add extra inhibitors additives which claim to side of the vehicle, improve the system. These can be harmful. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL COLD, or a little higher, When your engine is warm, the level should be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher. 6-20 If this light comeson, it means you’re low on engine coolant. Turning the radiator pressurecap when the engine and radiator are hotcan allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burnyou badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap-- even a little -- when the engine and radiator arehot. Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but becareful not coolant recovery tank. to spill it. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spillcoolant on a hot engine. 6-21 Radiator Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid NOTICE: I Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa) I pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine j damage from overheating. Be sure thearrows on the cap line upwith the overflow tube on the radiator filler radiator neck. I When you replace your radiator pressure cap, anAC@ cap isrecommended. I Thermostat The power steering fluid reservoir is located tothe right Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat of the engine coolant reservoir, at the back of the in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the engine compartment. flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat is recommended. I 6-22 Gh When to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use It is not necessary to regularly check power steering Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat fluid unless you suspect thereis a leakin the system or kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system Lubricants’’ in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and and repaired. damage hoses and seals. How To Check Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid When theengine compartment is cool,unscrew the cap What to Use and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tightenit. Then remove the capagain When you need windshield washer fluid,be sure to read and look at the fluid levelon the dipstick. the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature When the engine compartmentis hot, the levelshould be may fall below freezing, usea fluid that has sufficient at theH mark. When it’s cold, thelevel should be at the protection against freezing. C mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid. Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tankis full. NOTICE: When usingconcentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water. Don't mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn't clean as well as washer fluid. 0 Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it's very cold. This allows for expansion, which coulddamage .I the tankif it is completely full. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is locatedon the 0 Don't use radiator antifreeze in your driver's side of the vehicle, towardthe front of the windshield washer. It can damageyour engine compartment. washer system and paint. .. .I 6-24 Brakes brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The otherreason is that fluid is Brake Fluid leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work I ll I at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct aleak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. If you have too much brakefluid,.it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. Itis filled is hot enough.You or others could be burned, with DOT-3 brake fluid. and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake There areonly two reasons why the brake fluid level in fluid only when work is doneon the brake the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake hydraulic system. fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal 6-25 When your brakefluid falls to a low level, your brake NOTICE: warning light will corn oa. See "Brake System W&ing 0 Using the wrong fluid can badly damage Light" in the Index. -.' brake system parts. Forexample, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can dam'age brake system parts so badly that they'll have to be replaced. Don't let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle's What toAdd painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be When you do need brake fluid,use only DOT-3 br &e damageld. Becareful not tospill brake fluid fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11@ (GM Part on your vehicle. If you do, washit off No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealedtj .i = immediately. See "Appearance Care" in container only, and always clean the brake fluid ''1, ' ' : 1, . ;. the Index. reservoir cap before removing it. :.I. CAUTION: -A With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake 1 system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could crash. Always use the proper brakefluid, -... 6-26 Brake Wear Your Pontiac has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. NOTICE: Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake could resultin costly brake repair. pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound A may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake pedal firmly). squeal when the brakes are firstapplied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. A CAUTION: Free movement of brake calipers and properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake The brake wear warning sound means that pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake calipers sooner or later your brakes won’t work well. for movement, brake pads for wear, and evenly torque That could lead to an accident. When you hear wheel nuts in the proper sequence toGM specifications. the brake wear warning sound, have your Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if vehicle serviced. you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brakedrums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. Whenyou have the front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. 6-27 1 Brake Pedal Travel Battery .i ’: i.; . , , I, i., I. See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return’to Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom@battery. You normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal. never have to add water to one of these. Whenit’s time travel. This could be a sign of brake troub’le. for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom battery. Get onethat has the replacement number shown Brake Adjustment on the original battery’s label. Every time you apply the brakes, with or without tl Vehicle Storage vehicle moving, yourbrakes adjust for wear. .. If you’re not going drive to your vehiclefor 25 days or more, .. . 8. Replacing Brake System Parts . ~ *. <, .I take off the black, negative (-) cable from tbe battery. %s will help keepyour battery from running down. The bralung system on a modern vehicle is comple Its many parts have to be of top quality and work wxe. 11 together if the vehicle is to have really good brakinq. Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM bzake parts in them, as your Pontiac does when it is new. When you replace parts of your braking system -- for Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas example, when your brake linings wear down and you that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get ne aren’t careful. See 66Jump Starting’’in the Index genuine GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your ”i €or tips on working aroun’da battery without brakes may no longer work properly. For ‘example,if getting hurt. someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for yopr vehicle, the balance between your front and rear braes can change -- for the worse. The braking performaice Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare yourvehicle you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if for longer storage periods. someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts,.../ Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index. Jump Starting Headlamps For jump starting instructions, see “Jump Starting” in the Index. Bulb Replacement For the type of bulb, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch thebulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. 1. Remove the two black knobs. 2. Tilt the bulb housing forward. 4. Pull outthe bulb assembly. 5. Disconnect the bulb wiring harness fromthe bulb assembly by lifting the plastic locking tab. 6. Snap a new bulb assembly into the wiring harness. 7. Replace the bulb assembly by reversing Step 3. 8. Replace the bulbhousing and the two black knobs. Front Parking/Turn SignalLamps 1. Remove the headlamp assembly as described under “Headlamps.” 2. Remove the lamp socket furthest inboard by pinching the lever and turning counterclockwise. -4 3. After replacing the bulb, line up the flanges on the socket with the slotsin the headlamp capsule, 3. Twist the L-shaped bulb assembly counterclockwise 4. Push and turn the socket one-sixth of a one-sixth of a turn until the flanges align with the turn clockwise. slots in theretainer ring. Front Sidemarker 3. Pull the sidemarker lamp assembly forward and away from thefender. 1. Remove the headlamp assembly. See “Headlamps” L in the Index. 4. Remove the sidemarker lamp socket by turning counterclockwise. 5. Replace the bulb and insert the bulb socket into the bulb assembly. Twist clockwise to lock in place. 6. Replace the sidemarker assembly making sure the assembly nut is through the hole in the fender. 7. Attach the nut to the bolt. 8. Replace the headlamp assembly. 2. Unbolt the retaining nut from the sidemarker lamp assembly bolt. 6-31 3, Twist the lamp socket counterclockwiseto remove it License Plate Lamp _... ,. I- from the lamp lens. 1. Remove the two screws from the lamplens.:p. i.:"..' ."...&,.-11!'*" '. P. 4. Replace with the new bulb and twist thelamp socket clockwise in the lamp lens. 5. Replace the lamp lensin the liftgate and tighten with screws. Back-up Lamps 1. R Love thelicense plate. 2. Unscrew tbe two bolts andpull the housing away from the tailgate. 3. Remove the bulb from the lamp socket. 4. Replace with thenew bulb: and twist thelarnp socket clockwise in the lamp assembly. - the :.. 1 5. Reinstall entire back-up lamp housing and secure 2. Removethe lamp lens from the liftgate. :., :I with the screws. ... -. , ;; 6. Replace the license plate. Center High-MountedStoplamp 1. Remove the two screws from the lamp assembly. 4. Reinstall the lamp assembly into the liftgate and secure with the screws. 2. Pull the assembly out and away from the liftgate. 3. Remove the bulbs from the lamp socket. 6-33 ____~~~~~ ~ ~ 4. Pull off the entire taillamp housing. For the type of bulb, see “Replacement Bulbs” in. the Index. 1. Open the rear side windows and liftgate. 2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp hous 3. Undo the spring clips under the weatherstrip at !the rear of the side window. I I 6-34 ;_. 1’ ’’ ’ 5. Pinch the lever and twist the bulb assembly one-sixth of a turn counterclockwise to remove. 6. Remove the bulbby pressing in and turning one-eighth of a turn counterclockwise. 7. Line up the small retainer bumps on the replacement bulb so that the lower bump slides into the deepest slot inthe housing. Press in and twistthe bulb one-eighth of a turn clockwise. Reposition the bulb assembly in the taillamp housing.Turn the assembly one-sixth of a turn clockwise to lockin place. 8. Replace the entire taillamp housing and screws. 9. Attach the spring clips to the taillamp housing and secure them. 10. Close the rear side windows and liftgate. 11. Test the bulbs by using your turn signals and taillamps. For any bulb changing procedure not listedin this section, contact your Pontiac dealer service department. 6-35 Windshield,Wiper Blade Replacement,1 Tires We don't make tires.Your new Pontiac comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire mufacturex. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details. Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous. Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. _ic.. . . i&+ iX" 4) ~ . You could have anairout and a serious Replacement blades for your vehicle are 24 inches, accident. See "Loading Your Vehicle"in (61 cm) in length. They come indifferent types and are the Index. removed in different ways. Here's how to remove the -. , CAUTION: (Continued) i. I ; ',. type with a release clip: y.I, . 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from &.;; '. . the windshield. :+ , , i. . , 2. Lift the release clip with a screwdriver and pulllthe blade assembly off the wiper arm. .:. ' 1 3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wipel" arm. ..I , . NOTICE: 0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as Don’t let anyone tellyou that underinflationor overloaded tires. The resulting accident overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires could cause serious injury. Check all tires don’t have enough air (underinflation),you CIR frequently to maintain the recommended get thefollowing: pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tiresare cold. Too much flexing 0 Too much heat 0 Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured or brokenby a sudden 0 Tire overloading impact -- such as when you hit a pothole. 0 Bad wear Keep tiresat the recommended pressure. Bad handling Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your Bad fuel economy. tread is badly worn, or if your tires have If your tires have too muchair (overinflation), been damaged, replace them. you can get the following: Unusual wear 0 Bad handling Inflation -- Tire Pressure Roughride The CertificationITire label, which is on the rear edge of 0 Needless damage from road hazards. the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours ordriven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). 6-37 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more. Don’t forget your compact sparetire. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). ‘li .1.i j . . .. , , . .: 1 , . ..:r ~ .,r , ;. How to Check .x’ ‘I Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire ’ pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look 1 properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and.z, moisture.7.’. ; uniform wear for a11 tires on thevehicle. The first 5“ rotation is the most important.See “Scheduled Tire Inspection and Rotation 8 .-1.P y ~ Maintenance Services” in theIndex for scheduled Tires should be inspected every 6,000 to 8,000’miles rotation intervals. (10 000 to 13 000 h)for any signs of unusual wear. When rotating your tires, always usethe correct rotation If unusual wear is present, rotate yourtires as soon as pattern shown here, possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Don’t include the compact spare tirein your tire rotation. Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for .-’F.F . , more information. ., ., After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear When It’s Time for New Tires inflation pressures as shownon the Certificatioflire One way to tell when it’s label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly time for new tires is to tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque’’ in the Index. check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm>or less of tread remaining. Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nuts becomeloose after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When you changea wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places wherewheel the attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can You need a new tire if any of the following statements use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; butbe are true: sure to use a scraper orwire brush later,if you You can see the indicators at three or more places need to, to getall the rust ordirt off. (See around the tire. “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.) You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cutor snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut or other damagethat can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. 6-39 Buying New Tires To find outwhat kind and sizeof tires you need, loPk at the CertificatiodTirelabel. I i The tires installedon your vehiclewhen it Mixing tires couldcause you to lose control while a Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types number on each tire's sidewall. When you get (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehiclemay not get ones with that same TPC Spec number. handle properly, andyou could have a crash. your vehicle will continue tohave tires that Using tires of different sizes may also cause to give proper endurance, damage to your vehicle. Be sureto use the same traction, rideand other size and type tireson all wheels. on your vehicle. If your tires havean design, the TPC number willbe It's all right to drive with your compact spare, (for mud and snow), though. It was developed for use on your vehicle. If you ever replaceyour tires with those not kavind a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed ratingand construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. $-x... - 1, - Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear The following information relates to the system The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on developed by the United States National Highway the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by conditions on a specified government test course. For treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The (1 1/2) times as well onthe government course as a tire grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system :.,' upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, may depart significantly from the norm due to variations space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with in driving habits, service practices and differences in nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), road characteristics and climate. or to some limited-production tires. Traction -- A, B, C While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are A, B, grades, they must also conform toFederal safety and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on requirements and additional General Motors Tire wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. I' Temperature -- A, B, C :>,;-> . I", 1 WheelAlignment and 1 *eBalance The temperature gradesare A (the highest),B, and ~C, The wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced representing the tire's resistance to the generationof carefully at the factoryto give you the longest tire life heat and its abilityto dissipate heat whentested un&er and best overall performance. controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratry In most cases, you will not needto have your wheels test wheel. Sustained high temperature can causet 4~ e material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tirelifp, aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling oneway or the other, the and excessive temperature can leadto sudden tireb.' I alignment may need to be reset.If you notice your failure, The grade C corresponds to a levlelof ;;1 performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet vehicle vibrating when driving ona smooth road,your wheels may need to be rebalanced. under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard ~ No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheel; than the .(' 1 minimum required by law. ., ., Warning: The temperature grade for this tire .-* is established fora tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. .<.'.,.*%. -? , 1 ..dl.-.- , .-&.,% - j -;.* .: !. . .'*.<. -3 . , .. ..i.> , ,, ., .: .,<; 8.' ., b..-- I- ' . .. i .I_. -1 , I:I. (' - /;:; !., - . . I_- . :--.>,I ,.. . , ,I , , I .. . :..;,' . 2 .. ~... . >,, ,.<. . . 1. kq.r7'. I -.. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. 6-43 Used Replacement~ Wheels Tire Chains NOTICE: Putting a used wheel on your vehicleis dangerTus. Use tire chains only where legaland only when You can't know how it's been usedor how maqy you must. Use only SAE Class "S" type chains miles it's been driven.It could fail suddenlyand that arethe propersize for your tires. Install cause an accident. If you haveto replace a whekl, them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible withthe endssecurely use a new GM original equipmentwheel. ;ii,:.,. 7v':, 1;- !<,.; fa,stened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain manufa'cturer's instructions.If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow downuntil it stups. Driving toofast or spinning thewheels with chains on will damage yourvehicle. ~ Appearance Care Don't use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flameif you strike a Alcohol match or get themon a hot part of the vehicle. Some are Laundry Soap dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. 0 Bleach When you use anything from a container to clean your Pontiac, be sure to follow the manufacturer's warnings 0 ReducingAgents and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you're cleaning the inside. Cleaning the Insideof Your Pontiac Never use these to clean your vehicle: Use a vacuum cleaner oftento get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. 0 Gasoline Your Pontiac dealer has two GM cleaners, a 0 Benzene solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered 0 Naphtha cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather. 0 Carbon TLLacnloride Here are some cleaning tips: 0 Acetone 0 Always read the instructions onthe cleaner label. 0 Paint Thinner 0 Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. 0 Turpentine 0 Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change toa clean area 0 Lacquer Thinner often. A soft brush may be used if stains arestubborn. 0 Nail Polish Remover 0 Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don't saturate the stained area. 0 If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. 6-45 Using Foar-Type Cleaner on Fabric Using Solvent-Qpe Cleaner 01 lbric \,w . 1, Vacuum and mush the area to remove any . iy .. First, see if you have to use solvent-typecleaner at all. loose dirt. -e*.:,>,I, I - f ' Some spots and stains will clean off better with just 8'. ...$I.....<, I >: 1 . -.,; , water and mild soap. 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. If you need to use a solvent: 3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following Gently scrape excesssoil from the trimmaterial the directions on the container label. with a clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge..i.,_ cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of I, ',.:I. . 5. Don't saturate the material. i. the stain, "feathering" toward the center. Keep ,.,.q= . , , 1.i I changing to a clean sectionof the cloth. 6. Don't rub it roughly. . . ;,'I **, :. 7. !#<,:-I. :., 7. As soon as you've cleaned the section, use a sponge When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a to remove the suds. -_ . :L>q cleaning ring. 8. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge': 9. Wipe off what's left with a slightly damp paper ,":.+. '.*., . - 8, y*.~. .., 1: towel or cloth. , ,.. I. 10. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer. . "1' .' 2.;:. .. 11. Wipe with a clean cloth ..,,I v ,,'\ I ,,' d7 . I. . , A'' I Special Cleaning Problems 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomitor urine, treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution: Greasy or Oily Stains 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) Stains causedby grease, oil,butter, margarine, shoe of lukewarm water. polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic 4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-typecleaner. creams, vegetable oils,wax crayon, tar and asphalt can be removed as follows: Combination Stains 1. . Carefully scrape off ,excess stain. Stains causedby candy, ice cream,mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains canbe removed as follows: 2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with cool water and allowto dry. 3. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle’s seat fabric.They should be If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner. removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will1 dissolve them and may causethem Cleaning Vinyl to spread. Use warm water and a clean cloth. Non-Greasy Stains Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.You may have to do it more than once. Stains causedby catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urineand blood can Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stainif be removed as follows: you don’t get themoff quickly. Usea clean cloth and a GM Vinymeather Cleaner or equivalent product. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with coolwater. 2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. i.' . Cleaning Leather 3; : Cleaning the Built-In Child Use a soft clothwith lukewarm water and a mild st ap or Restraint Pad saddle soap. The built-in child restraint padis attached tothe seat 0 For stubborn stains, use aGM VinylLeather C :aner frame with fastener strips.You can remove the padand or equivalent product. hand wash it with mild soap andwater. Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based orabr: ;ive Care of Safety Belts and Built-in cleaners, furniture polishor shoe polish on leat .er. Child Restraint Harness Soiled leather shouldbe cleaned immediately.1 dirt is allowedto work into the finish, canit ha m Keep the safety beltsand the built-in child restraint harness clean anddry. the leather...... Ij, - - Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Paqel Use only mild soap and water to clean the sur€acestop A CAUTION: of the instrument panel. Sprays containingsiliconek or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the wind$hield Do not bleachor dye safety beltsor the built-111 and even make it difficult to see through the windshield child restraint harness.If you do, they may be under certainconditions. $C- ...*.: 1,. severely weakenled. Ina crash, they might notbe able to provide adequate protection. Clean the safety belts and the child restraint harness only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Glass Wiper blades should be checked ona regular basis and replaced when worn. Glass should be cleanedoften. GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner Weatherstrips will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least window, since they may have to be scraped off later. every six months. During very cold, damp weather If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear more frequent application may be required. (See window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.) Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. Cleaning the Outsideof Your Pontiac The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield, of color, gloss retention and durability. Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield Washing Your Vehicle washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to or other material may be on theblade or windshield. keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@ (GM Part No. 1050011). Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct raysof the sun. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use rinse it with water. liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based, Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on Then rinsethe blade with water. 6-49 the surface, orthey could stain.Dry the Einish wid a soft, clean chamois ora 100% cotton towel to avoid1 NOTICE: surface scratches and water spotting. j ' Before you enter an automatic car wash, if your vehicle Machine compoundingor aggressive polishingon is equipped with the optional power slidingdoor, qe sure a basecoatlclearcoat paintfinish may hull the to h,ave theON/OFF switch in the10FF position. finish or leave swirl marks. "I' " ' High pressure car washesmay came water to ente7 your vehicle. ., ~ . : '$.el' Foreign materials suchas calcium chloride and other i: salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird FiP%hCare -'; .. . droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can uccasional waxing or mild polishingof your Pont *' : by damage your vehicle's finishif they remain on painted hand may be necessary to rernuve residua from the:paint surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to remove fo'reign matter. I from your dealer.(See "Appearance Care andMat&rials" I in the Index.) gyl?f' .. . I: Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather Your Pontiac hasa "basecoatlclearcoat" paint finish. and chemical falloutthat can take their toll overa period The clearcoat gives more depthand gloss to the colored of years. You can helpto keep the paint finishlooking , basecoat. Always use waxes and polishesthat are , ; new by keeping your Pontiac garagedor covered non-abrasive and made fora basecoatlclearcoat whenever possible. paint finish.paint ':,,e.$-.~-. -, . ' , , 6-50 It- Aluminum Wheels (If So Equipped) ~~~ NOTICE: Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax When applying a tire dressing always take careto may then be applied. wipe off any oversprayor splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels ofthe vehicle. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted Petroleum-based products may damage the surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or paint finish. abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Finish Damage Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These should be repaired right away. brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up Tires materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can becorrected To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. in yourdealer’s body and paint shop. 6-51 Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Chemicals used for ice andsnow removal and dustj Some weather and atmospheric conditions can createa control can collect onthe underbody. If these arenbt chemical fallout. Airborne pollutantscan fall uponand removed, accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on^ attack painted surfaceson your vehicle. This damage the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame,floori can take two forms: blotchy, singlet-shaped pan and exhaust system even though they have discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into corrosionprotection. :.::?&.I, -, : I ... the paint surface. At least every spring, flush these materials fromthb Although no defect in the paintjob causes this, Pontiac underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud will repair, at no charge tothe owner, the surfacesof and other debris can collect.Dirt packed in dosed areas new vehicles damagedby this fallout condition within of the frame should be loosened beforebeing flushled, 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, Your dealer or an underbody vehiclewashing system whichever occurs first. can do this foryou. Collision Repair Your vehicle was built with composite SMC (Sheet Molded Compound) fiberglassbody panlels and molded RIM (Reaction Injection Molded) front fendersand bumper covers. These panels require different collision repair procedures than metal-paneled vehicles. Seeyour Pontiac dealer for information on collisionrepair. , . I I 'I , .I .I .I , ,...... -- 8. -, ...... _,, . ,.. , I .. - -. ' .. I - .#.., ' ' ,. -,. ,:- ,, , /. ..I Appearance Care Materials Chart PART NUMBER USAGE DESCRIPTION SIZE 1050004 sq. ft. Shines vehicle without scratching Chamois 2.75 1050172 16 oz. (0.473 L) Tar and Road Oil Remover Also removes old waxes and polishes 1050173 oz. (0.473 L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish 16 Removes rust and corrosion 1050174 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner 16 Removes soil and blackmarks 105020 1 02. (0.473 L) Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish 16 Exterior cleanerand polish 1050214 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl and Leather Cleaner 32 Spot and stain removal 6-53 Vehicle Identification Number (VJN) the model designation, paint information, and a list of all production options and special equipment. I LI II 11111.11 1.11 111 111111 It. 11111111 111111111111 11t111111tI - hd SAMPLE4UXTM072675 Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. ENGINEfi96 ? \ ASSEMBLY Electrical System CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT I‘ Electrical Add-on Equipment This is the legal identifier for your Pontiac. It appearson a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts Don’t add anything electricalto your Pontiac labels and the certificates of title and registration. unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle E ngine IdentificationEngine ’- ’I and the damage wouldn’tbe covered by your The eighth character in your VIN is the engine cod?. warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment This codewill help you identify your engine, can keep other componentsfrom working as specifications and replacement parts. Service Parts Identification Label Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to You’ll find this label inside theglove box door. It’s, very add anything electrical to your Pontiac, see“Servicing helpful if you ever needto order parts. On this label is: Your Ais Bag-Equipped Pontiac” in the Index. 0 your VIN, I ,f Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Breakers The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuitbreaker in The wiring circuits in your vehicle areprotected from thelamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers lamps to go on andoff, or in somecases to remain off. and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the If this happens, have your headlamp system checked chance of fires caused by electrical problems. right away. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the Windshield Wipers band isbroken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace abad fuse with a new one of the identical size The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit and rating. breaker and a fuse.If the motor overheats due toheavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If If you ever have aproblem on the road and don’t have the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be a spare fuse, you canborrow one that has the same sure to get it fixed. amperage. Just pick some featureof your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette Power Windows and Other Power Options lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the right amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. Circuit breakers in the circuit breakerhelaypanel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When There are four fuseblocks in your vehicle: the the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens instrument panel fuse block, the circuit breakerhelay and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem panel, the Anti-Lock Brake System junctionfuse block is fixed. and the injector fuse. 6-55 CTSY TAIL p-"l R WIPER ECM e eSTOP HAZ TURN B/U F WIPER n r""l GAUGES/AC IGN E p-4 RDOIIAUX LPS HTR-AIC ABS R BLW The instrument panel fuse block is in the glovebox. Fuse Usage Pull the door open to gain access to the instrument panel. CTSY Automatic Door Lock Module, Dome fuse block. Lamps, Courtesy Lamps, Power Door Lock Switches, GloveBox Lamp, Power Mirrors, Keyless Entry Receiver ELC Electronic LevelC'ontrol, Air Inflator, Underhood Lamp HORN Horns, Horn Relay, Safety Belt Buzzer. Lamps On Reminder, Key in the Ignition Warning Fuse Usage Fuse Usage STOP HAZ Hazards, Rear Stoplamps,Anti-Lock LPS Interior Lamps Dimming,Rear Climate Brake System (ABS), Center Control Blower, Door Lock Switches, High-Mounted Stoplamp Temperature and Compass Display, F PUMP Fuel Pump,Rear Engine Fan Relay Headlamp and InstrumentPanel Dimmer Switch, Heater-A/C Control, RDOIlAUX Radio, Cigarette Lighter, Accessory Instrument Panel Cluster, Illumination Power Outlet, Trailer Harness, for Power Sliding Door Switches Heater-A/C Control ABS ABS Enable Relay TAIL Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Module, Headlampand Instrument RD02 Radio, Steering Wheel Controls Panel Dimmer Switch (to LPS fuse), R WIPER Temperature and Compass Display, Power SlidingDoor Controller Rear Window Wipermasher ECM Powertrain Control Module F WIPER Windshield and Rear Window TURN B/U Automatic Door Locks Module, Wipermasher Back-up Lamps, Power Sliding Door IGN Cruise ControlSwitch, DRL Module, Alarm Module, Fog Lamp Relay, Heater-NC Control, Speedometer and Power Sliding Door Controller, Tachometer, Rear Window Defogger Keyless Entry Receiver, Brake-Transaxle Relay, Safety BeltReminder Chime, Shift Interlock (BTSI), Front/Rear Lamps on Reminder, Key in the Turn Lamps Ignition Warning GAUGES/AC NCCompressor Relay, DRL Module, HTR-NC Low Speed NCBlower Relay ABS, Electronic Level ControlHeight R BLW RearClimate Control Blower Sensor, Instrument Panel Cluster, Power Sliding Door Controller Circuit Breakermelay Panel \I i ;. Circuit Usage .1 , '8 ' I. :< . ' '. 8. , !,. Breakers 1 Hazard Flas;hers 1 :1: ..I. I I I' I 2 Automatic Trarisaxle, Evaporative (fuse) Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve, Evaporative Emissions Canister Purge Vacuum Diagnostic Switch, Linear ExhaustGas Recirculation (EGR) Valve, Front Engine Fan Relay, Heated Oxygen Sensors, Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 3 Daytime Running Lamps (Canada Only) Circuit breakers and relaysare located in the circuit breakerhelay panel. This is located behind the paneh 4 Power Windows under the glove box, near the passenger's door. 5 Power Seat, Bower Sliding Door Controller, Power Door Locks 6 Rear Defogger 7 Air Conditioning Blower,Rear Blower Motor 8 Horns 9 Safety BeltReminaer Chime, Lampson Reminder, Key In the Ignition Warning (Chime Module) 10 Rear Defogger Timer Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Junction Block Fuse Injector Fuse You’ll find this fuse under the hood in the ABS junction This fuse is located under the hood, on a bracket just behind block, located next to the remote positive jump the passenger’s side headlamp. It is mounted on the face of starting terminal. the bracket in the position closest to the passenger’s sideof the vehicle. The fuse services the injectors, fuelpump, oil To open the junction block, press in on both sides of pressure sender and fuel pump switch. the cover. To access the fuse,pry back the latchwith a screwdriver, then pull down on the baseof the unit.If you need to replace the fuse, be sure to use one with the same amperage. Push the base of the unit firmly into the cover until the latch snaps into the locked position. 6-59 I' Replacement Bulbs I . OUTSIDE LAMPS BULB INSIDE LAMPS BULB .. + Back-up Lamps ...... PO57 Dome Lamps Center High-Mounted Stoplamp ...... : 577 Front ...... 561 Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps ...... 3 15 N/A Rear ...... 561 License Plate Lamp ...... !194 Halogen Headlamps Outer ...... 9006 Inner ...... Fog Lamps ...... Po,,881 Front Sidemarker Lamps ...... ~ 194 Stop/Tail/Turn Signal Lamps Upper Two Positions ...... 194 Lower Two Positions ...... io57 Underhood Lamp ...... ' 561 Capacities and Specifications Engine Crankcase ...... 4.5 to 5 quarts 3.75 L Oil change with filter change. Use your dipstick tomeasure. Automatic Transaxle When drainingor replacing torque converter; morefluid may be needed. Pan Removal and Replacement ...... 6 quarts 5.70 L After Complete Overhaul ...... 8 quarts 7.60 L Cooling System With Air Conditioning ...... 11.75 quarts 11.25 L With Rear Climate Control ...... 12.75 quarts 13.5 L NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sureto fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. Refrigerant (R-l34a), Air Conditioning Front A/C only ...... 2.25 lbs. 1.02 kg Front and Rear A/C ...... 3 Ibs. 1.36 kg Not all air conditioning refrigerantsare the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needsrefrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you ’re not sure, ask your Pontiac dealel: For additional information,see your “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information” booklet. FuelTank ...... 20 gallons 76 L Tire Pressures, Sizes ...... See CertificatiodTire label on driver’sdoor. WheelNutTorque ...... 100 lb-ft 140 N-m NOTE: All capacitiesare approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. 6-61 EngineSpecifications ,-..I... . , Dimensions .I I . VIN Engine Code ..., .., , + , .., , ...... :'. ... E Wheelbase ...... 109.8 inches 2788 mm ILL*-!<&!'..Type ...... V6 Tread Width Displacement ...... , , I . , , ,., , , ...... 3.4L Front ...... 59.2 inches 1503 mm Firing Order ... + ...... , 1-2-3-L.-5-6 Rear ...... 61.4 inches 1559 mm Thermostat Temperature Length ...... 192.2 inches 4881 rn Specification ...... , . 195°F (1 , 'C) Width ...... 44.6 inches 1894 mm Height ...... 65.7 inches 1670 mm Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts Air Cleaner Element ...... Engine Oil Filter ...... PCV Valve ...... Spark Plugs ...... Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52imm) ...... Key1 3 Entry Battery (I) CR-1 bo328, .' .-.I 1 ' -,..;j.\,'' ,$h'. ,-;\ 1 *-,it. I $=- ' ! . &*,? I ;'.I '1 ..4 . , ' _... , I 8, i .,I ' 1 ...... ')_ ' , i NOTES 6-64 Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule Introduction IMPORTANT: KEEP ENGINE OIL Your Vehicle and the Environment AT THE PROPER Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even This section covers the maintenance required for your affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid Pontiac. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its levels or the wrong tire inflation canincrease the level safety, dependability and emission control performance. of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your Pontiac dealer for details. 7-1 How This Section is Organized ‘-4 1 ,., .:’. ,. . “Part €5:Owner Checks and Services” tells your what ,, should be checked wheneveryou stop for fuel. It also The remainder of this section is divided into five explains whatyou can easilydo to help keep your Tart A: ScheduledMaintenance Services” vehicle in good condition. what tohave done and how often.Some of these “Part C: PeriodicMaintenance Inspections’’ explains services can be complex, so unless you important inspections thatyour Pontiac dealer’s service qualified and have the department or another qualified service center let your dealer’s service department or service centerdo these jo’bs. should perform. ((Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” lists some productsGM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, shouldbe used whether you do the work yourself or have it done. Performing maintenance work on vehicle a can be dangerous. In trying to do some youjobs, dan ((PartE: Maintenance Record” provides a place be seriously injured.Do your own maintename for you to record the maintenance performedon your vehicle. Wheneverany maintenance is performed, be work only if you have the required know-how sure to write it down in thispart. This will helpyou and the proper tools and equipment for the job. determine when your next maintenance shouldbe done. If you have any doubt, havea qualified In addition, it is good a idea to keep your maintenance technician do the work. receipts. Theymay be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. If you are skilled enoughto do some work on your vehicle, you will probably wantto get the service information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner Publications’3in the Index. Part A: Scheduled Maintenance The proper fluidsand lubricants to use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle Services uses these. All parts shouldbe replaced and all Using Your Maintenance Schedule necessary repairs done beforeyou or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We at General Motorswant to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But wedon’t know These schedules are for vehicles that: exactly how you’ll drive it.You may drive very short carry passengers and cargowithin recommended distances only a few times a week. Or youmay drive limits. You will find these limitson your vehicle’s long distances all the time very in hot, dustyweather. CertificatiodTire label. See“Loading Your Vehicle” You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or in the Index. you may drive itto work, to do errands or in many are driven on reasonable road surfaceswithin legal other ways. driving limits. Because of all the different ways people usetheir GM use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. vehicles, maintenance needsvary. You may even need more frequent checksand replacements than you’llfind Selecting me Kight Schedule in the schedules inthis section. So please read this section and note howyou drive. If you have any First you’llneed to decide whichof the two schedulesis questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood right for your vehicle. Here’show to decidewhich condition, see your Pontiac dealer. schedule to follow: This part tells you the maintenance servicesyou should have done and whenyou should schedulethem. If you go toyour dealer foryour service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service peoplewill perform thework using genuine GM parts. ., .- Maintenance Schedule ..x.. .. , ~~~ Short TripKity Definition IntervalsTriplCity Short 1 1 ~~ ~ Follow the Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule if any Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter one of these conditions istrue for yourvehicle: Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). Every 6,000 Miles ~(10000 km): Chassis Lubrication (or 6 months, whichever occurs first). This is particularly important when outside .1 At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) Then Every temperatures are below freezing. .-'::: ',.I: , -- 12,000 Miles(20 000 km): Tire Rotation. 0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter driving in stop-and-go traffic). !.! Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Most trips are through dusty areas. -....A ,Y.1, - 'i. .. 1' Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner you frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on tbp of Filter Replacement. your vehicle. *: ' .,I: Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditions only). 0 If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application. Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and Lines One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if Inspection (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine to oil break - Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System I Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). down soonel: ., Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. .8 These intervals onlysummarize maintenance services. 'I Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. 7-4 Maintenance Schedule Long Tripmighway Definition Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter conditions from the ShortTrip/City Maintenance Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Schedule is true. Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under occurs first). highway conditions causes engine oil to break At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) -- Then Every down slowel: 15,000 Miles (25 000 km),:Tire Rotation. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive BeltInspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark PlugReplacement. These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. 7-5 Short TriplCity Maintenance 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000biles' 0Change engine oil and filter (or every ( 166 000 km) should be performed after100,000, &les 3 months, whichever occurs first). ( 166 000 km) atthe same intervals...... -.. An Emission Contrd Service. ....,., . Footnotes ; i. , The U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency or th California Air Resources Board has determined th t the failure to perform this maintenance item will notn i , llify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance servicesbe performed atthe indicated intervals and the mainte+-., ... :, .:B I recorded. .i: be a"?. .- 7-6 1 Short Tkip/City Maintenance Schedule I 6,000 Miles (10 OOO$.km) 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement and lubricate if required. DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7-7 -I I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). :.&:+? 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. $,:" .T.': An Emissiun Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components;see footn te # 0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving (or every 6 months, whichever occursfb It). in dusty conditions..Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUALMILEAGE BY ' 7-8 1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst). Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipersfor fkeedom of movement and lubricate if required. I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-9 1 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I .. . 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every ; I7 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,whichever occurs first). $j3: I= 3 months, whichever occurs first), %._' , An Emission Control Sewice. "'y.3%1 .. r; : An Emissim Control Sewice. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnot:e # (or every 6 months, whichever occws fi$lt) . I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: L I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) El Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement and lubricateif required. I Short Trip/City Maintenance Scdpdule I I I' 39,000 Miles (65 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. Cl Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). I I I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 1 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: rI I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emission Control Sewice. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). in dusty conditions. Replace filter if Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and necessary. An Emission Control Service. Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipersfor fieedom of movement and lubricate if required. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-13 ~~ I -ShortTripKity Maintenance Sc 4i!l90O0Miles (80 000 km) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter 3 months, whichever occurs first). if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or An Emission Control Service. more of these conditions: CI Lubricate chassis components; seefootn - In heavy city traffic where the outside (or every 6 months, whichever occurs fi temperature regularly reaches 90 OF ,:I...... , (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. .. . - Uselssuch as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid andfilterdo not require changing. -3L DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICE1 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B% ~~ ~ bhort Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) O Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control /Sewice. An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#k (or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst). 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement and lubricate if required. I DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BY: 7-15 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. Replace air cleaner filter. An Emissicm Control Service. 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed, An Emissim Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: ~ L - Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 63,000 Miles (105 000 km) 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first), 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers forfreedom of movement and lubricateif required. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-17 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) ,?.:: L ~ 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) Is] Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. I .I .. , . 5& .P ,-'%' . 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 6 months, whicheverOCCUTS first). I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: L7-18 - r- -~ I I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 78,000 Miles (130 000km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# in dusty conditions. Replace filter if (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). necessary. An Emission Control Service. I7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement and lubricateif required. I DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I ’.,. Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 84,000 Miles (I40 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service, 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). RATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ~SERVICEDBY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components;see footnote # (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement and lubricate if required. I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-21 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 96,000 Miles (I60 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil 'and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). DATE MILEAGE SERVICED BY. -~ACTUAL I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 99,000 Miles (165 000 km) ,I00,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter(or every 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system 3 months, whichever occursfirst). (or every 60 months since last service, An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressurecap. An Emission Control Sewice. 0Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. DATE SERVICEDACTUAL MILEAGE BY: (Continued) 7-2:) Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule l00,OSO Miles (166 000 km) (Continued) 0Replace spark plugs, s-,w .. %.!J . - In hilly or mountainous terrain. An Emission Control Service. $y;, ; . . - When doing frequent trailer towing. ''!.. . 0Change automatic transaxle fluid and'&erI: - Uses such as found in taxi, police or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or delivery service. more of these conditions: If you do not use your vehicle underany of these - In heavy city traffic where the outside: conditions, thefluid andfilter do not require changing. temperature regularly reaches 90' F (32°C) or higher. - .. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICCED BY: ~ - ~ Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles 0Change engine oil and filter (or every (I66 OOO km) should be performed after 100,000 miles 12 months, whichever occursfirst). (166 000 lun) at the same intervals. An Emission Control Service. Footnotes 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). California Air Resources Board has determined that the 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and failure toperform this maintenance item will not nullify Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, pattern and additional information.During urge that all recommended maintenance services be tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance of movement and lubricate if required. be recorded. # Lubricate the parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage. 7-25 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every .l!. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). ?.! . I 12 months, whichever occurs first). I ., An Emission Control Service. I.. .., An Emission Control Service. 17 Lubricate chassis components; see footnkte.# Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 12 months, whichever occursfist). ,. 1 i) :;: Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and $%>:.j;< Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation , :. . . i<;, pattern and additional information. During , ., ’< ! I* tire rotation, check brake calipers for fi-eedom ’. ,> 1 ., of movement and lubricate if required. ., I .I 1 >~ I ~ ~. I I I DATEACTUAL MILEAGE S’ERVICEDBY DATE .- I L c Long TriplHighwaV Maintenance Schedule 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Replace air cleaner filter. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and An Emission Control Service. Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipersfor fieedom of movement and lubricateif reauired.1 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every. .. . Change automatic transaxlefluid and filter 12 months, whichever occurs first). :: ... , if the vehicleis mainly driven under one or An Emission Control Service. .,. . more of these conditions: 0Lubricate chassis components; see footno e# - In heavy city traffic where the outside . (or every 12 months, whichever occurs fi st). temperature regularly reaches 90 OF (32' C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you donot use your vehicle underany of these conditions, the fluid andfilterdo not require changing. I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE DATE ACTUALMILEAGE SERVICED BY: -p .. r I; 52,500-Miles(87 500 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occursfist). (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). [7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation 0Replace air cleaner filter. pattern and additional information. During An Emission Control Service. tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage of movement and lubricateif required. or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: -- -- 7-29 ,Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 1 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) ..IJ Change engine oil and filter (or every . .. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every >’ I, , 1 12 months, whichever occurs first). . a 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. I, Y , .I ,, An Em,ission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnpte# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 12 months, whchever occurs first). 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’*in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.During tire rotation, check brake calipersfor freedom of movement and lubricateif required,,, .- .-.I .I, - DATE A,CTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: LL 1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst); 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0Replace air cleaner filter. Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation An Emission Control Sewice. pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for fi-eedom of movement and lubricate if required. . .. 1. DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 97,500 Miles (162 500 kt) 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or 12 months, whichever occurs first). every 60 months ,since last service, An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). See “Engine Lubricate chassis components; sleefootnote ## Coolant” in the Index for what to use. (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap md neck. Pressure test the 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and j, I(::. ; f Rotation” in the In’dexfor proper rotation cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for fieedom Inspect s’park plug wires. An Emission Control Service. of movement and lubricate if required. . -. ,/; DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: li' 171 Replace spark plugs. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. An Emission Control Service. - When doing frequent trailer towing. !J Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter - Uses such as found in taxi, police or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or delivery service. more of these conditions: vyou do notuse your vehicle under any of these - In heavy city traffic where the outside conditions, thefluid andfilter donot require changing. temperature regularlyreaches 90 OF (32°C) or higher. DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-33 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check I Listed below are owner checksand services which Check the engine coolant level and theadd proper should be perhrmed at the intervals specifiedto he1 coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” inthe Index for further details. ensure thesafety, dependability and emission contrs.. I 1 -’ performance of YOU^ vehicle. ,.;:;; . jr.: Windshield WasherFluid Level Check Be sure any necessary repairs are completedat oncq Check the windshield washer fluid level in the Whenever any fluids or lubricants added to your are windshield washer tank and add the proper fluidif vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, assho W n necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index in Part D. for further details. - ,. At Each Fuel Fill ,,,> _I ; . At Least Once a Month It is important for you or a service station attendant it0 perjiorm these underhood checks at eachhelfill. ,.-. , , . Tire Inflation Check -1 I , Make sure tiresare inflated to the correct pressures. See Engine OilCheck Level 1,- 1. I,. -, “Tires” inthe Index for further details. Check the engine oil leveland add the proper oil -if I necessary. See “Engine Oil” inthe Index for : I Cassette Deck Service further details. ..., . . Clean cassette deck,Ckaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details. At Least Twice a Year At Least Once aYear Restraint System Check Key Lock Cylinders Service Make sure the safety belt reminder light andyour all Lubricate the key lock cylinderswith the lubricant belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are specified in Part D. working properly. If your vehicle hasa built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, Body Lubrication Service latch plates, buckle, clip, childhead restraint and Lubricate all bodydoor hinges, includingthe liftgate. anchorages are working properly. Look forany other Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for loose ordamaged safety belt and built-in child restraint the hood, sliding door track, rear compartment, glove system parts. If you see anythingthat might keepa box door andany folding seat hardware.Part D tells you safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing what to use. More frequent lubricationmay be required its job,have it repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety when exposed toa corrosive environment. belts orharness straps replaced. Also look for anyopened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (Theair bag system does not need regular maintenance.) Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level;add if needed. See “Automatic Transaxle” inthe Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the systemand repair if needed. 7-35 Starter Switch Check Brake-Transaxle ShiftInterlock (BTSI) Check I- I 1 A CAUTION: ~~ When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others couldbe injured.Followthe steps below.injured. Followstepsbelow. the .??';: ~ t .; Y', 1. Before you start, be sureyou have enough roomx. 't - - 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. .:i,. <', I..i > .I) ' I ;!. .. around the vehicle. It should be parked on a 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see "Parking level surface. Brake" in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake, 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see "Parking Brake" NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and bel in the Index if necessary). ready to turn off the engineimmediately if it starts, NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should immediately if the vehicle begins to move, work only in PARR (P) or NEUTRAL (N). I€ the 3. With the engine off, turn the key tothe RUN position, starter works in any other position, your: vehicle but don't start the engine. Without applying the regular needs service. brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. E the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle's BTSI needs service. Steering Column Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill,with the vehiclefacing While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn downhill. Keeping your foot onthe regular brake, set the parking brake. the key to LOCK in each shiftlever position. The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift To check the parking brake: With the engine running lever is in PARK (P). and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until The key should come out only in LOCK. the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePARK (P) To check the PARK (P) mechanism's holding ability: Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plainwater to flush any corrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to When you are doing this check, yourvehicle clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other deb --'-, could begin to move. You or others could be can collect. injured and property could be damaged. Make sure thereis room in front of your vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should thevehicle begin tomove. holes, looseconnections or other conditionswhich could Part C: Periodic Maintenance .. (1: .. , . ’. , cause a heat build-up in the floor panor could let Inspections ,, ,. . 1. exhaust fumes into thevehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” Listed beIow are inspections and services which sho Id in the Index. be performed at least twice a year (for instance, eacl spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s se lice Radiator and HeaterHose Inspection department or other qualified service center do ‘these iobs. Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at or :e, cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, Proper procedures to perform these services may bt fittings and clamps; replace as needed. found in a Pontiac ServiceManual. See “Service ar I Owner Publications’’ in theIndex. Throttle Linkage Inspection Inspect the throttle linkage for interferenceor binding, Steering, Suspension and Front-Wheel-Dr ve and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts as Axle Boot and Seal Inspection needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or >,( , ! excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise Inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering control cables. system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs’*. o 1 I wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steerihg Brake System Inspection lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and axle boot seals for damage,tears or leakage. Replace hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, seals if necessary. chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads forwear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings Exhaust System Inspection .- , for wear and cracks. Inspect other brakeparts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Inspect the complete exhaust system.Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look forbroken, damaged,, Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seahs, your brakes inspected more oftenif your drivinghabits ’. : 1 or conditions result in frequent braking. ~~ Part D: Recommended Fluids and USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Lubricants Coolant GM Part No. 3634621 or NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identifiedbelow by name, Supplement equivalent with a complete part number or specificationmay be obtained from your Sealer flush and refill. GM dealer. Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11@ Brake Fluid System (GM Part No. 1052535 or USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). Engine Oil Engine oilwith the American Parking Brake Chassis lubricant(GM Part Petroleum Institute Certified For Cable Guides No. 1052497 or equivalent) or Gasoline Engines “Starburst” lubricant meeting requirements symbol of the properviscosity. To of NLGI Grade2, Category LB determine the preferred viscosity for yourvehicle’s engine, see or GC-LB. “Engine Oil” in the Index. Power Steering GM Power SteeringFluid System (GM Part NO. 1052884 - 1 Pt., Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled)and GM 1050017 - 1 qt., or equivalent). Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL” or Automatic DEXRON@-I11Automatic Havoline@ DEX-COOLTM Transaxle Transmission Fluid. (orange-colored, silicate-free) ~~~ Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube@ antifreeze conforming toGM Cylinders (GM Part No. 12346241 Specification 6277M. See “Engine or eauivalent). Coolant” in the Index. 7-39 I’ USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Chassis Chassis lubricant (GM Part Hood and Door Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@ Lubrication No. 1052497 or equivalent) or Hinges, Rear (GM Part No. 12346241 lubricant meeting requirements Folding Seat, or equivalent). of NLGT Grade 2, Category LE3 Fuel Door or GC-LB. Hinge, Rear Windshield GM OptiMeen@Washer Solveat Compartment Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) Lid Hinges or equivalent. Sliding Door Lubriglate lubricant aerosol Track Hood Latch Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or ,I;. . equivalent) or lubricant meeting Assembly, (GM Part No. 12346293 or .’ - Pivots, Spring equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Anchor and requirements of NLGI Grade 2 Category LB or GC-LB. ’.? : .. . . Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. ._... . . ,. il Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). See “Replacement Parts” in the Index forrecommended replacement filters and spark plugs. Part E: Maintenance Record Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on After the scheduled services are performed, record the the following record pages. Also, you should retain all date, odometer reading and who performed the service maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. is a convenient place to storethem. Maintenance Record I ODOMETER I DATE READING BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED SERVICED ~ 7-41 I Maintenance Record Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here YOU will find out how to contact Pontiac if 'you need Pontiac Cares assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report&y safety defects. This section includes information on: 0 The Pontiac Cares Program 0 The Customer Satisfaction Procedure 0 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users 0 Roadside Assistance 0 Courtesy Transportation 0 BBB Auto Line -- Alternative Dispute Resolution Program 0 Reporting Safety Defects 0 Service and Owner Publications With the PONTIAC CARES program, you are never more than a phone call away fromhaving your concern taken care of. 8-1 The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are Customer Satisfaction Procedure designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognize you as a valuable customer, appreciates your purcha e decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person ... YOU! PONTIAlC CARES Ii valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac,is: a fe ture that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety, security, comfort and convenience. What makes up Pontiac Cares? 0 A 3 year/36,000 mile Bumperto Bumper Warran y @ Roadside Assistance 1 Courtesy Transportation All of these elements combine to make your driving I experience an enjoyable one, and are discussed in greater detail further in your owner’s manual. Pontiab is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed in giving you an exceptional level of Your satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour customer care throughout the ownership experience dealer and Pontiac. Normally, any concern you may Our goal is to createtotal customer enthusiasm in our have with your vehicle can be handled by your selling product and our services, and make you the most I or servicing dealer. Your dealer has thefacility, trained satisfied customer in the world. technicians, special tools and up-to-date information to promptly address any issue which may arise. 8-2 I8 Pontiac has empowered its dealers to makeany 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135 decisions and repair vehicles, and they are eager to (English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) resolve your concern toyour complete satisfaction. If 0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, take the following steps: 0 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122 STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern witha member of dealership management. Normally,concerns can be 0 In all other Caribbean countries: 1-809-763- 1315 quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has alreadybeen 0 In other overseas locations, call GM North American reviewed with the Sales,Service or Parts Manager,contact Export Sales in Canada at 1-905-644-4112. the owner of the dealership or the General Manager. For prompt assistance, please have the following STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealer information available to givethe Customer management, it appears your concern cannot beresolved Ass'istance Representative: by the dealership without further help, contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 0 Your name, address, home and business 1-800-PM-CARES. In Canada, contact telephone numbers GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in 0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at 1-800-263-7854 (French). the top left of the instrument panel and visible For help outside of the United States and Canada, call through the windshield.) the following numbers as appropriate: 0 Dealership name and location In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage 0 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 0 Nature of concern 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 8-3 prompt attention.However, if you wish to writePolritiac, Telephone (TTY) Users write to: yp,, , ', j. 33,,+!,. .,?. . 8. To assist customerswho are deaf, hard of hearing, r. OF Pontiac Division r: I ::@. 4 speech-impaired andwho use Text Telephones [TTYs), ._., .I Customer Assistance Center , . ..I,.pr-: ... , . . , .; Pontiac has TTY equipment availableat its Customer One Pontiac Plaza " . _' : ,)'4.,: I Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith .- /_. Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 '.f:,.' ' :. L ,, .. , )' Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT. (TTY users in Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Information booklet for addressesof Canadian and-..+, *I. , ..-, ' . GM Overseas offices. .I ,i~r ...:' When contacting Pontiac, please remember thatyo'' r concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer's facilities, equipmentand personnel. That is why we suggest YOU follow Step One firstif you have a concern. Pontiac's Roadside Assistance toll-free number is Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing 1,. minor repair informationover the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicleto the nearest Pontiac dealer. We will provide the following services for A 3 year/36,000 miles, at no expense to you: 0 Vehicle out of fuel f Keys locked in vehicle Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service Change a flat tire Jump starts Courtesy Transportation -- See Pontiac Courtesy '. 1 Transportation section for details Security While You Travel 1 -SOO-ROADSI&E (1-800-762-3743) As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in thePontiac Roadside Assistance program. This value-added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road. 8-5 We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or following additional services depending on your nee ds: reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac's Hotels judgement the claims become excessive in frequencyor type of occurrence. Glass replacement While we hope that you never have the occasion to use Rental vehicle or taxis our service, it is added security while traveling for you Police, fire department or hospitals and your family. Remember,we're only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance -- 1-800-ROADSIDE In many instances, mechanical failures are covered or 1-800-762-3743. under Pontiac's comprehensive warranty. However, when other services are utilized, OUT advisors will Canadian Roadside Assistance explain any paymentobligations you might incur. Vehicles purchased in Canada havean extensive For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, plf ase Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere provide the following information to give the advisa _.** in Canada or the United States..Please referto the &.;+. separate brochure provided by the dealeror call Location of vehicle -...... l . 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Fr, .r:: i Telepnone number of your location .. q3 r . ;ji&.. Vehicle model, year and color ;*:... ! Mileage of vehicle ,, ;> .. 1. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Vehicle license plate number .,.-I,.:I. ' . .:. ': .. ..- ,.. '._ .- . .I,. . -, i' /- !< .. 2::;;; . ! . I.. -p..: > 8-6 .. . . :.. .. , -',i\. ''h ,.J& , .- Pontiac Courtesy Transportation It applies to any repair covered under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) limited warranty, and to any 1996 Pontiac requiring repair as a result of product recall or special policy situations. For same day service, you are entitled to one-way shuttle service-:.. of up to 10 miles. If the repairs require an overnight ;; stay for the car, you're entitled toeither a Pontiac loaner.... . : or reimbursement for a rental car, up to $30/day, for up;.;:....' to 5 days. Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Pontiac will reimburse you, up to $30/day, for any documented transportation you receive. For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, Pontiac strives to give you a worry free ownership of interim transportation may be available under the your vehicle, and we realize the inconvenience of being Courtesy Transportation Program. Pleaseconsult your without a car. So Pontiac has come up with a way to dealer for details, The RoadsideAssistance program is eliminate any frustrations you might have when trying available only in the United States and Canada. to get a ride to work, or wondering how you will get >. ;:,gs.f.< home. Well, your worries are over. Pontiac provides IT *7. r' ., .,Y no-cost transportation when you bring your 1996 Pontiac in for warranty service. GM Participation in BBB BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to LINE -- Alternative Dispute settle disputesbetween customers and automobile Resolution Program* manufacturers. This programis available free of charge customers who currently lease a vehicle. *This program may not be available in to own or GM depending on statelaw. Canadian If you are not satisfied after followingthe Customer Warranty and Owner Assistance Satisfaction Procedure,you may contact the BBBusing General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility the toll-free telephonenumber, or write th'em atthe limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in 1 following address: this program. BBB AUTO LINE Both Pontiac and your Pontiae dealerare Council of Better Business Bureaus making sure you are completely satisfied 4200 Wilson Boulevard vehicle. Our experience hasshown that, if a situation Suite 800 , . .,.. , arises whereyou feel your concern has not been ':-' . , Arlington, VA 22203 adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction,:? .. I Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 Procedure described earlier in this section is :;.;K: I. ', - . 8, . very successful. ;, < .* ' To file a claim, you will be asked to provideyour name f'-. and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) There may be instances where an impartialthird party and a statement of the natureof your complaint, can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement ~ Eligibility is limited by vehicle ageand mileage, and regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation 'of the Ne& other factors. Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving theie disagreements, Pontiac voluntarily 'participates in BBB AUTO LINE. We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. TheBBB will attempt TO THE UNITED STATES to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary GOVERNMENT between you and Pontiac. If this mediation is If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled cause a crash or could cause injury or death,you should where eligible customers may present their case to an immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic impartial third-party arbitrator. Safety Administration (NHTSA), inaddition to The arbitrator will make a decision which you may notifying General Motors. accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will b'e If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an bound by that decision. The entire disputeresolution investigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy time you file a claim until a decision is made. campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved Some state laws may require you to use thisprogram in individual problems between you, your dealer or before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program General Motors. or inthe courts. For fuflher information, contact the To contact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or thePontiac Customer Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Assistance Center at 1-800-PM-CARES. the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 8-9 REPORTING SAFETY DEFEC'dS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN 5K.C.6P4. ;.* j",,.*2 TO GENERAL MOTORS ..._ .. lY-- GOVERNMENT , _. In addition to notifyingNHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this,we certainly hope you'llnotify If YOU live in Canada, andyou believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediatelynotify us. Please call usat 1-800-PM-CARES or write: Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Pontiac Division Motors of Canada Limited.You may write tlo: Customer Assistance Center Transport Canada One Pontiac Plaza Box 8880 Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 Ottawa, OntarioK1G 352 In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motorsof Canada Limited Customer CommunicationCentre 1908 ColonelSam Drive Oshawa, OntarioL1H 8P7 Service and Owner Publications Service Manuals Service manuals contain diagnostic andrepair information for all chassis andbody systems. They may be useful for ownerswho wish to get a greater understanding of their vehicle. They are also useful for owners with the appropriate skilllevel or training who wish to perform “do-it-yourself” service. These are authentic General Motors servicemanuals meant for professional, qualified technicians. Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manualsand other service literature are available for purchase for all current and many past model General Motors vehicles. Toll-free telephone numbers for ordering information: United States ...... 1-800-551-4123 Canada ...... 1-800-668-5539 s-I1 Service Bulletins Owner .Publications Service bulletins covering various subjects are regulbly Owner's manuals, warranty folders and various owner sent to all General Motors dealerships. GM monitord assistance booklets provide owners with general product performance in the field. When service me ods operation and maintenance information. are found which promote b'etter service on GM vehiqles,4 bulletins are created to help thetechnician perform better service. Service bulletins may involve any numb'er of vehicles. Some will describeinexpensive I -B service; others will describe expensive service. Somk will advise of new or unexpected conditions, and othlers may help avoid future costly repairs. Service bulletins are meant for qualified technicians. In some cases ~ bulletins refer to service manuals, specialized tools, ' equipment and safety procedures necessary to service the vehicle. Since these bulletins are issued throughout the model year and beyond, an index isrequired and published quarterly to help identify specific bulletim. Subscriptions are available. You can order an index at the toll-free numbers listed previously, or ask a GM dealer to see an index or individual bulletin. I I - I' 8-12 ~~ v Section 9 Index Accessory Power Outlet ...... 2-64 Anti-Lock Brake System Block Fuse ...... 6-59 AddingElectrical Equipment ...... 2.25. 6.54 Appearance Care ...... 6-45 Adjusting Rear Seats ...... 1. 13 Appearance Care Materials ...... 6-53 AirBag ...... 1-28 Ashtrays ...... 2.57.2.58 How Does it Restrain ...... 1-3 1 Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Touch Control ...... 3-20 How it Works ...... 1-30 Audio Equipment. Adding ...... 3-21 Location ...... 1-30 Audio Systems ...... 3-9 Readiness Light ...... 1.29.2.73 Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-5 Servicing ...... 1-33 Customizing ...... 2-6 What Makes it Inflate ...... 1-3 1 Automatic Overdrive ...... 2-28 What Will You See After it Inflates ...... 1-32 Automatic Transaxle Check ...... 7-35 When Should it Inflate ...... 1-3 1 Automatic Transaxle Fluid ...... 6-15 Aircleaner ...... 6-14 HowtoAdd ...... 6-18 AirConditioning ...... 3-2 Howtocheck ...... 6-16 Air Conditioning Refrigerants ...... 6-61 Whentocheck ...... 6-15 AirInflator ...... 2-65 Automatic Transaxle Operation ...... 2-26 Alignment and Balance, Tire ...... 6-42 Shifting ...... 2-26 Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ...... 6-5 1 Automatic Transaxle Park Mechanism Check ...... 7-37 AMAX ...... 3-13 Antenna, Integrated Roof ...... 3-23 Back-up Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-32 Antifreeze ...... 6- 18 Battery ...... 6-28 Anti-Lock Jump Starting ...... 5-2 Brake System Warning Light ...... 2-75, 4-6 Replacement, Keyless Entry System ...... 2-10 Brakes ...... 4-6 Warnings ...... 5-3 9-1 BBB Auto Line ...... 1 8-8 Canadian Roadside' Assistance ...... 8-6 Bench Seat ...... l 1-5 Capacities and Specifications ...... 6-61 Folding the Seatback ...... 1-5 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-35.4-26. 4.33 Removing ...... ~1-5 Cassette Deck Service ...... 7-34 Replacing ...... 1-6 'Cassette Tape Player ...... 3-11. 3-13 Better Business Bureau Mediation , 8-8 ...... Cassette Tape Player Care ...... 3-22 Boosterseat ...... 1-51 CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-17 Brake Center High-Mounted Stooplamp Bulb Replacement .... 6-33 Adjustment ...... -28 Center Rear Passenger Position (Bench Seat) ...... 1-38 Fluid ...... -25 Center Rear Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) ...... 1-39 Master Cylinder ...... ::6-25 Certificatioflire Label ...... 4-27 Parking ...... #-30 Chains.Safety ...... 4-32 Pedal Travel ...... 6-28 Chains. Tire ...... 6-44 Replacing System Parts ...... -28 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-23 SystemWarning Light ...... 2-74. -26 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-64 Trailer ...... 1-33 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 6-52 Transaxle Shift Interlock ...... 2-34 ChildRestraints ...... 1-53 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check ...... 7-36 Built-in ...... 1-43 Wear ...... 8-27 Cleaning Built-in ...... 6-48 Brakes. Anti-Lock ...... 4-6 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position ...... 1-55 Braking ...... *I4-5 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position Braking in Emergencies ...... !4-8 (BenchSeat) ...... 1-57 Break-In. New Vehicle ...... 2-22 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position BTSI ...... 2-34 (Bucket Seat) ...... m...... 1-59 BTSICheck ...... 7-36 TopStrap ...... 1-54 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-29 mere to Put ...... 1-53 .. Cigarette Lighter ...... 2-57 ...... 1 .> / .. ... Circuit Breakermelay Panel ...... 6-58 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ...... 6-55 Cleaner. Air ...... i ...... 6-14 Cleaning Coolant ...... 6-18 Aluminum Wheels ...... 6-51 Heater. Engine ...... 2-25 Built-in Child Restraint ...... 6-48 Recovery Tank ...... 5-17 Fabric ...... 6-46 Courtesy Transportation ...... 8-7 Glass ...... 6-49 Cruise Control ...... 2-42 Inside of Your Pontiac ...... 6-45 Cupholders ...... 2-57. 2-59 ... Instrument Panel ...... 6-48 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users ...... 8-4 Leather ...... 6-48 Customer Assistance Information ...... 8-1 Outside of Your Pontiac ...... 6-49 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 8-2 Special Problems ...... 6-47 Customizing Your Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-6 Stains ...... 6-47 Tires ...... 6-51 Damage. Finish ...... 6-51 Vinyl ...... 6-47 DaytimeRunning Lamps ...... 2-46 Wheels ...... 6-5 1 Defects. Reporting Safety ...... 8-9 Windshield and Wiper Blades ...... 6-49 Defensive Driving ...... 4-1 Climate Control System ...... 3- 1 Defogger. Rear Window ...... 3-8 Clock. Setting the ...... 3-9 Defogging ...... 3-8 Coinholder ...... 2-58 Defrosting ...... 3-8 Comfort Controls ...... 3- 1 Delco LOC 116 ...... 3-17 Compact Disc Care ...... 3-22 Dimensions.Vehicle ...... 6-62 Compact Disc Player ...... 3- 15 Dome Lamps ...... 2-48 Compact Disc Player Errors ...... 3- 17 Door Compact Overhead Console ...... 2-56 Front ...... 2-3 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-33 Locks ...... 2-3 Compass Calibration ...... 2-55 Power Sliding ...... 2-13 Compass. Electronic ...... 2-54 Resetting the Power Sliding ...... 2-17 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-5 Sliding ...... 2-11 Convenience Net ...... 2-60 Driver Position ...... 1-20 Convex Outside Mirror ...... 2-5 1 .. .. 9-3 Driving ...I I .... Cooling System ...... 6-61 City ...... 4-18 Exhaust ...... 2-35 Defensive ...... 4- 1 Identification ...... 6-54 Drunken ...... 4-2 OilLevelCheck ...... 7-34 Freeway ...... 4-19 Overheating ...... 5-13 InaBlizzard ...... 4-25 Running While Parked ...... 2-35 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-3 Specifications ...... 6-62 IntheRain ...... 4-15 StartingYour ...... 2-24 Night ...... 4-13 Engine Oil ...... 2-80. 6-9 OnCurves ...... 4-8 Adding ...... 6-10 On Grades While Towing a Trailer ...... 4-35 Additives ...... 6-12 On Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-21 Checking ...... 6-10 On Snow and Ice ...... 4-23 Used ...... 6-13 Throughwater ...... 4-17 Whattouse ...... 6-11 WetRoads ...... 4-15 WhentoCh~ge...... 6-13 Winter ...... 4-23 Exhaust. Engine ...... 2-35 With a Trailer ...... 4-33 DrunkenDriving ...... 4-2 Fabric Cleaning ...... 6-46 Dump and Stow Feature ...... 1-9 Lever.Fan Comfort Controls ...... 3-2 Filling Your Tank ...... 6-4 Electricd Equipment. Adding ...... 2-25.3-21. 6-54 Filter. Air ...... 6-15 Electrical System ...... 6-54 Finishcare ...... 6-50 Electricql System. Adding Equipment ...... 2-25, 6-54 Finish Damage ...... 6-51 Electronic Compass ...... 2-54 FirstGear ...... 2-29 Electronic Level Control ...... 4-27 Flashers. Hazard Warning ...... 5-1 Engine ...... 6-8 Flat Tire. Changing ...... 5-23 Codant ...... 6-18 Fluid Capacities ...... 6-61 Coolant Heater ...... 2-25 Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-39 Coolant Level Check ...... 7-34 Fog Lamps ...... 2-47 Coolant Temperatur'e Gage ...... 2-76 Foreign Countries. Fuel ...... 6-3 Four-Way Manual Seat .... 1- 1 Halogen Bulbs ...... 6-29 ...... French Language Manual . . ...11 HazardWarning Flashers ...... 5-1 FrontDoors ...... 2-3 HeadRestraints ...... 1-4 FrontSidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-31 Headlamps ...... 2-45 FrontTowing ...... 5-9 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-29 FrontTurn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-30 High/LowBeam Changer ...... 2-39 Fuel ...... 6-2 OnReminder ...... 2-46 Filling. Your Tank ...... 6-4 Wiring ...... 6-55 Gage ...... 2-83 Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance ...... 8-4 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-3 Heating ...... 3-3 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 6-55 High-Beam Headlamps ...... 2-39 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-21 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-21 Gages Hitches. Trailer ...... 4-32 Engine Coolant Temperature ...... 2-76 Hood Fuel ...... 2-83 Checking Things Under ...... 6-6 Speedometer ...... 2-71 Prop ...... 6-7 Tachometer ...... 2-72 Release ...... 6-6 Voltmeter ...... 2-74 Horn ...... 2-37 Garage Door Opener ...... 2-52 Hydroplaning ...... 4-17 GAWR ...... 4-27 Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-26 GloveBox ...... 2-56 Ignition Positions ...... 2-23 GrossAxle Weight Rating ...... 4-27 Illuminated Entry ...... 2.11. 2-48 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...... 4-27.. Inflation. Tire ...... 6-37 en FranGais Guide en ...... 11 Inflator.Air ...... 2-65 GVWR ...... 4-27 Injector Fuse ...... 6-59 9-5 Inside Daymight RearviewMirror ...... I . ; 2-49 Tire-Loading Information ...... 4-27 Inspections .2.;;.../ I .. ..:I.'.i . Vehicle Identification Number ...... 6-54 Brakesystem ...... 7-38 La~ps...... 2-45 Exhaust Systems ...... 7-38 Dome ...... 2-48 Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot ...... 7-38 Interior ...... 2-47 Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal . , ..., ...... , .. 7-38 On Reminder ...... 2-46 Radiator and Heater Hose ...... 7-38 Underhood ...... 6-9 Steering ...... 7-38 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-7 Suspension ...... 7-38 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ...... 2-33 Throttle Linkage ...... 7-38 License Plate Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-32 InstrumentPanel ...... 2-68 Liftgate ...... 2-19 Brightness Intensity Control ...... , ...... 2-47 Liftgate Ajar Light ...... 2-82 Cleaning ...... 6-48 Liftgate Lock ...... 2-21 Cluster ...... 2-70 Lighter ...... 2-57 FuseBlock ...... 6-56 Lights Interior Lamps ...... 2-47 Air Bag Readiness ...... 1-29. 2-73 Interior Lights Override Switch ...... , ..+ , .. 2-47 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...... 2-75, 4-6 Brake System Warning ...... 2-74. 6-26 Interior ...... 2-47 Ja'ck, Tire ...... 4-25 Jumpstarting ...... 5-2 Liftgate Ajar ...... 2-82 Low Coolant Warning ...... 2-77, 6-21 LowFuel ...... 2-84 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...... 7-35 LowOilLevel ...... 2-81, 6-9 Keys ...... 2-1 Power Sliding Door Warning ...... 2-81 Safety Belt Reminder ...... 1- 15. 2-73 Labels Service Engine Soon ...... 2-77 CertificatiodTire ...... 4-27 Loading YourVehicle ...... 4-27 Service Parts Identification ...... 6-54 Lock Delay ...... 2-9 Locking Storage Bin ...... 2-58 Y ....I Locks ...... 2-3 Maintenance. Underbody ...... 6-52 AutomaticDoor ...... 2-5 Maintenance When Trailer Towing ...... 4-36 Cylinders ...... 7-35 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 2-77 Door ...... 2-3 Manual Front Seat ...... 1-2 Key Lock Cylinder Service ...... 7-35 Manual Remote Control Mirror ...... 2-50 Liftgate ...... 2-21 Matching Transmitters to Your Vehicle ...... 2-10 PowerDoor ...... 2-4 Mirrors ...... 2-49 Sliding Door ...... 2-12 Convex Outside ...... 2-51 Sliding Door Child Security...... 2- 18 Inside Daymight Rearview ...... 2-49 Steering Column Lock Check ...... 7-37 Manual Remote Control ...... 2-50 Low Coolant Warning Light ...... 2-77, 6-21 Power Remote Control ...... 2-50 Low Fuel Light ...... 2-84 Visor Vanity ...... 2-64 Low Oil Level Light ...... 2-81. 6-9 Mode Buttons. Comfort Controls ...... 3-2 Lubricants and Fluids ...... 7-39 MountainRoads ...... 4-21 Lubrication Service. Body ...... 7-35 Multifunction Lever ...... 2-38 Luggagecarrier ...... 2-61 Net. Convenience ...... 2-60 Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts ...... 15-62 Neutral ...... 2-27 Maintenance Record ...... 7-41 New Vehicle “Break-In” ...... 2-22 Maintenance Schedule ...... 7- 1 Night Vision ...... 4-14 How Section is Organized ...... 7-2 Introduction ...... 7-1 Long Tripmighway Definition ...... 7-5 Odometer ...... 2-71 Long Tripmighway Intervals ...... 7-5 Odometer.Trip ...... 2-71 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-34 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-10 Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-38 Oil. Engine ...... 6-9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-39 Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 2-80 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-3 Opener. Garage Door ...... 2-52 Sh’ortTrip/City Definition ...... 7-4 Overhead Console ...... 2-51 Short TripKity Intervals ...... 7-4 Overheating Engine ...... 5-13 ... .. -9-7 Overriding Lock Delay ...... 2-6 Power Steering Fluid ...... 6-22 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-34 When to Check ...... 6-23 Owner Publications. Ordering ...... 8- 12 How to Check ...... 6-23 What to Use ...... 6-23 Paint Spotting. Chemical ...... 6-52 Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ...... 1-33 ~ Problems on the Road 5-1 Park ...... Publications. Service and Owner 8-11 Automatic Transaxle ...... ' 2-26 ...... Shifting Into ...... 2-3 1 ShiftingOut of ...... 8 2-34 Radiator ...... : ...... 5-20 Parking Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 6-22 AtNight ...... ' 2-22 Radio Reception ...... 3-20 Brake ...... ~2-30 Radios ...... 3-9 Brake Mechanism Check ...... 7-37 Rain. Driving In ...... 4-15 Lots ...... ' 2-22 Reading Lamps ...... 2-49. 2-52 Over Things That Burn ...... 2-34 Raw WithaTrailer ...... 4-36 Outside Seat Position ...... 1-34 Passenger Position ...... 1-34 Seat Passengers ...... 1-34 Passing ...... 4-11 Towing ...... 5-11' Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-38 Window Defogger ...... 3-8 Pontiac Cares ...... 8-1 WindshieldWasher ...... 2-41 Power RearAirVents ...... 3-6 Accessory Outlet ...... 2-64 Rear Climate Control ...... 3-5 DoorLocks ...... 2-4 RearFan ...... 3-4 OptionFus~...... 6-55 Master Control ...... 3-7 Remote Control Mirror ...... 2-50 Rear Control ...... 3-7 Seat ...... 1-3 Rear Storage Compartments ...... 2-59 Sliding Door Warning Light ...... 2-81 Rearview Mirror. Inside Daymight ...... 2-49 Steering ...... 4-8 Reclining Front Seatbacks ...... 1-3 Steering Fluid ...... 6-22 Recovery Tank. Coolant ...... 5-17 Windows ...... 2-36 Refigerants. Air Conditioning ...... 6-61 9-8 .I Remote Saddlebags ...... 2-59 Lock ControlLock ...... 2-7 SafetyBelt Extender ...... 1-64 Power Sliding Door ...... 2-9 Safety Belts ...... 1-15 Removable Rear Bucket Seats ...... 1-8 Adults ...... 1-20 Removing the Bench Seat ...... 1-5 Care ...... 6-48 Replacement Center Rear Passenger Position (Bench Seat) ...... 1-38 . Bulbs ...... 6-60 Center Rear Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) ...... 1-39 Parts ...... 6-62 Children ...... 1-41 UsedWheel ...... 6-44 Driver Position ...... 1-20 Wheel ...... 6-43 Extender ...... 1-64 Replacing Rear Bucket Seats ...... 1-14 How to Wear Properly ...... 1-20 Replacing Safety Belts ...... 1-64 Incorrect Usage ...... 1.23. 1-63 Replacing the Bench Seat ...... 1-6 LapBelt ...... 1-39 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 8-9 Lap-Shoulder ...... 1.20.1.35. 1-38 Resetting the Power Sliding Door ...... 2- 17 Larger Children ...... 1-61 Restraints Passenger Position ...... 1-34 Checking ...... 1-64 Questions and Answers ...... 1-19 Head ...... 1-4 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ...... 1-34 Replacing Parts After a Crash ...... 1-64 Rear Seat Passengers ...... 1-34 System Check ...... 7-35 Reminder Light ...... 1- 15. 2.73 Restraints. Child ...... 1-53 Replacing After a Crash ...... 1-64 Reverse ...... 2-27 Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-34 Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-34 Smaller Children and Babies ...... 1-41 Roadside Assistance ...... 8-5 Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-33 Roadside Assistance. Canadian ...... ' ...... 8-6 WhyTheyWork ...... 1-16 Rocking Your Vehicle ...... 5-34 Safety Chains ...... 4-32 Rotation, Tires ...... 6-38 Safety Defects. Reporting ...... 8-9 Safety WarningsandSymbols ...... , . iii 9-9 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-3 Service Publications ...... , . . 8-11 Seatback Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac ...... 1-33 RecliningFront ...... 1-3 Shifting sea& Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-26 Adjusting Rear ...... 1-13 Into Park ...... 2-31 Booster ...... 1-51 Out of Pak ...... 2-34 DumpandStow ...... 1-9 Signaling Turns ...... 2-39 Entry to Third Row Bucket ...... 1- 10 Skidding ...... 4-12 Four-Way Manual ...... 1-1 Sound Equipment. Adding ...... 3-21 Manual Front ...... 1-2 Spare Tire, Compact ...... 5-33 Power ...... 1-3 Specifications and Capacities ...... 6-61 Rear ...... 1-5 Specifications, Engine ...... 6-62 Removable Rear Bucket...... , . 1-8 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance ...... 8-4 Removing CENTER OR LEE" Seats ...... 8 1- 12 Speedometer ...... 2-71 Removing LEFT ONLY Seats ...... 1- 12 SRS ...... 1-28 Removing RIGHT ONLY Seats ...... 1- 11 Stains. Cleaning ...... 6-47 Replacing Rear Bucket ...... 1- 14 Starter Switch Check ...... 7-36 Restraint Systems ...... 1- 1 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-24 Seat Controls ...... 1- 1 steam ...... 5-13 Securing a Child Restraint ...... 1-55 Steering ...... 4-8 SecondGear ...... 2-29 Codumn Lock Check * * . I ...... 7-37 Service In Emergencies ...... 4-9 Bulletins, Ordering ...... 8-12 Power ...... 4-8 Engine Soon Light ...... 2-77 Tips ...... 4-8 Manuals, Ordering ...... 8-1 1 Wheel. Tilt ...... 2-38 Parts Identification Label ...... 6-54 Steering Wheel Touch Controls ...... 3-20 Publications, Ordering ...... 8- 11 Storage Areas ...... 2-51 Work, Doing Your Own ...... 5-1 Storage. Overhead ...... 2-55 Service and Appearance Care ...... 6- 1 Storage. Vehicle ...... 6-28 Service and Owner Publications ...... 8- 11 Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow ...... 5-34 SunVisors ...... 2-64 Inspection and Rotation ...... 6-38 . Sunglasses Storage ...... 2-55 Loading ...... 4-27 Sunroof ...... 2-67 Pressure ...... 6-37 Supplemental Restraint System ...... 1-28 Temperature...... 6-42 Symbols. Vehicle ...... v Traction ...... 6-41 .. Treadwear ...... 6-41 .. 6-41 Tachometer ...... 2-72 Uniform Quality Grading ...... Taillamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-34 Used Wheel Replacement ...... 6-44 TapePlayerCare ...... 3-22 Wear Indicators ...... 6-39 Temperature Control. Comfort Controls ...... 3-2 Wheel Replacement ...... 6-43 TemperatureDisplay ...... 2-54 When It's Time for New ...... 6-39 Theft ...... 2-21 TopStrap ...... 1-54 Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player ...... 3-17 TorqueLock ...... 2-33 Thermostat ...... 6-22 Torque, Wheel Nut ...... 5-31, 6-61 ThirdGear ...... 2-28 TowingaTrailer ...... 4-29 Tilt Steering Wheel ...... 2-38 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 5-7 Time. Setting the ...... 3-9 Trailer Tire Chains ...... 6-44 Brakes ...... 4-33 Tire Loading ...... 4-27 Driving on Grades ...... 4-35 Tire-Loading Information Lab'el ...... 4-27 Driving with ...... 4-33 Tires ...... 6-36 Hitches ...... 4-32 Alignment and Balance ...... 6-42 Maintenance When Towing ...... 4-36 Buying New ...... 6-40 Parking on Hills ...... 4-36 Chains ...... 6-44 Safety Chains ...... 4-32 Changing a Flat ...... 5-23 Tongueweight ...... 4-31 Cleaning ...... 6-51 Total Weight on Tires ...... 4-32 Compact Spare ...... 5-33 Towing ...... 4-29 Inflation ...... 6-37 Turnsignals ...... , 4-35 Inflation Check ...... 7-34 Weight ...... 4-30 Transaxle Fluid, Automatic ...... 6-15 . 9-11 . Transmitters, Keyless Entry System ...... , , . , 2-7 warning Devices ...... , . , ...... 5-2 Transportation, Courtesy ...... 8-7 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ...... 2-72 Trip Odometer ...... k-71 Washer Fluid, Windshield ...... 6-23 TTY Users ...... , ...... , . , . . 4 8-4 Washing Your Vehicle ...... , ...... 6-49 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . , ...... 2-39 Weatherstrips ...... 6-49 Turn SignaUMultifunction Lever ...... b-38 Wheel Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . , ...... 1-35 Alignment ...... 6-42 NUt'ForqUe .f...... I,...... ,,.... 5-31,6-61 I Replacement ...... 6-43 Underbody Flushing Service , . . . , ...... , ...... I -37 Wrench ...... 5-25 Underbody Maintenance , , , , , , . . . i-52 ...... Windows ...... 2-36 , -' .. 11.- Power , , . , . , , . . , . . , . , , . , , , , . , , ...... , . . . 2-36 vehicle Side Latches ...... 2-37 Control ...... r 4-5 Windshield Washer . , ...... , , . , . . . . , . , . . . , . , . . . . 2-4 1 Damage Warnings ...... Fluid ...... 2-41,6-24 Dimensions ...... Fluid Level Check ...... 7-34 Rear ...... 2-4-1 hading ...... Windshield Wiper ...... 2-40 Rear ...... 2-41 Blade Replacement ...... 6-36 Fuses ...... 6-55 Ventilation Tips ...... Winter Driving ...... 4-23 Visor Vanity Mirrors ...... Wiring, Headlamp ...... 6-55 Visors, Sun ...... Wrench,Wheel ...... 5-25 Voltmeter I996 c